k
>.
o^^^
IMAGE EVALUATrON
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
P
A
/
<Ls
^-;
,^^ jr;v .,. ^^
C <^> ^^:
/
.'sr «
#.
V]
<^
^^
^
/
^^/ v^ >
^ ^./
.^.-f
•^
^^
-^
i.O
I.I
11.25
i-'
Ml
US
2.5
ill
21
i£ 12.0
1.4
6"
Photographic
Sciences
Corporation
1=
1.6
23 WEST MAIN STREET
WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580
(7 -.6) 872-4503
l\
.V
:>l>^
\
:\
Ft?
CIHM/ICMH
Microfiche
Series.
CIHM/ICMH
Collection de
microfiches.
Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques
Technical and Bibliographic Note«/Not«s techniques et bibliographiques
The Institute has attempted to obtain the beat
original copy available for fiiming. Features of this
copy which may be bibliographically unique,
which may alter any of the images in tha
reproduction, or which may significantly change
the usual method of filming, are checked below.
D
Coloured covers/
Couverture de couleur
I I Covers damaged/
Couverture endommag^e
Covers restored and/or laminated/
Couverture restaurie at/ou peiliculAe
Cover title missing/
Le titre da couverture manque
Coloured maps/
Cartes giographiques en couleur
Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/
Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire)
Coloured plates and/or illustrations/
Planches et/ou illustrations en couleur
Bound with other material/
ReliA avec d'autrea documents
D
n
n
Tight binding may cause shadows or distortion
along interior margin/
Lareliure serree peut causer da I'ombre ou de la
distorsion le long de la marge intdrieure
Blank leaves added during restoration may
appear within the text. Whenever possible, these
have been omitted from filming/
II se peut que ce'taines pages blanches ajout^es
lors d'une restauration apparaissent dans le texta,
mais, lorsque cela 6tait possible, ces pages n'ont
pas 6ti film^es.
Additional comments:/
Commentaires suppldmentaires:
L'Institut a microfilm^ le meilleur exemplaire
qu'il lui a eta possible de se procurer. Les details
de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-dtre uniques du
point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier
une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une
modification dans la methods normale de filmage
sont indiqu^s ci-dessous.
The
tot
r~n Coloured pages/
Pages de couleur
Pages damaged/
Pages endommag^es
□ Pages restored and/or laminated/
Pages restaurdes et/ou pellicul^es
E Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/
Pages ddcolordes, tachet^es ou piqui
piquees
I I Pages detached/
Pages ddtachies
Showthrough/
Transparence
Quality of prir
Quality inigale de I'impression
Includes supplementary materii
Comprend du materiel suppl^mentaire
Only edition available/
Seule Edition disponible
[~7| Showthrough/
r~~] Quality of print varies/
r~j Includes supplementary materiel/
|~~| Only edition available/
n
Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata
slips, tissues, etc., have been refilmed to
ensure the best possible image/
Les pages totalement ou partiellernent
obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata, une pelure.
etc., cnt iti film^es i nouveau de facon a
obtenir la meilleure image possible.
Tha
pes
oft
fllnn
Ori]
beg
the
slor
othi
firsi
sior
or I
Tha
sha
TIN
whi
Mai
diff
enti
beg
righ
reqt
met
This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/
Ce document est film6 au taux de reduction indiqui ci-dessous.
10X 14X 18X 22X
26X
30X
y
12X
16X
20X
24X
28X
32X
The copy filmed here has been reproduced thanks
to the generosity of:
National Library of Canada
L'exemplaire film6 fut reproduit grAce A la
g^n^rositd de:
Bibliothdque nationale du Canada
The images appearing here are the best quality
possible considering the condition and legibility
of the original copy and in keeping with the
filming contract specifications.
Les images suivantes ont 6t6 reproduites avec le
plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition et
de la nettetd de l'exemplaire film6, et en
conformity avec les conditions du contrat de
filmage.
Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed
beginning with the front cover and ending on
the last page with a prirtied or illustrated impres-
sion, or the back cover when appropriate. All
other original copies are filmed beginning on the
first page with a printed or illustrated impres-
sion, and ending on the last page with a printed
or illustrated impression.
The last recorded frame on each microfiche
shall contain the symbol -^ (meaning "CON-
TINUED"), or the symbol V (meaning "END"),
whichever applies.
Les exemplaires originaux dont la couverture en
papier est imprimis sont fllmds en commenpant
par le premier plat et en terminant soit par ia
dernidre page qui comporte une empreinte
d'impression ou d'illustration, soit par le second
plat, salon le cas. Tous les autres exemplaires
originaux sont film6s en commen9ant par la
premidre page qui comporte une empreinte
d'impression ou d'illustration et en terminant par
la dernidre page qui comporte une telle
empreinte.
Un des symboles suivants apparattra sur la
dernidre image de cheque microfiche, selon le
cas: le symbols — »> signifie "A SUIVRE ", le
symbols V signifie "FIN ".
Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at
different rsduction ratios. Those too large to be
entirely included in one exposure are filmed
beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to
right and top to bottom, as many frames as
required. The following diagrams illustrate the
method:
Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent 6tre
film6s d des taux de reduction diff6rents.
Lorsque le document est trop grand pour dtre
reproduit en un seul cliche, 11 est filmd d partir
de Tangle sup6rieur gauche, de gauche d droite.
et de haut en bas. en prenant le nombre
d'images ndcessaire. Les diagrammss suivants
illustrent la mithode.
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
GR
J. FL
ELEMENTARY
GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION
WITH
exe:rcises based on xenophon,
ANABASIS, B. I., Ch. i.-viii.
BY
J. FLETCHER, M.A., LL.D., and A. B. NICHOLSON, B.A.
NEW EDITION.
TORONTO:
THE COPP, CLARK COMPANY, LIMITED.
1896.
^-/
Entered accordiiii; to Act of the Parliament of Canada, in the year one thousand
eifTht hiuK'red and ninety-six, l)y TiiK CoiT, Clark Company, LiMiTF.n, Toronto,
Ontario, in the Office of the Minister of Agriculture.
CONTENTS.
PAIIT T.
Section,
^ 1. The Article
' 2. Oratio Obliqua or Indirect Narration
• .'>, 4. The Article [Conthmi'd)
^ 5. The Adjective— Attributive and Predicative Position.. .
• G. Adjectives that take the Predicative Position
7. Concord
8. Apposition
9. Personal and Possessive Pronouns
10. Reflexives and Ahrixj
11. Demonstrative and Distributive Pronouns
12. The Indefinite T/^;
13. Interrogative Forms in Oratio Recta
14. The Genitive
15. Verbs that govern the Genitive
16. The Dative
17. The Accusative
18. Prepositions that govern one case only
19. Prepositions that govern (ienitive and Accusative
20, 21 . Prepositions that govern (ieniti ve, Dative, and Accusative
• 22. Relations of Time and Place
23. Comparative and Superlative
24. The Tenses
25. The Moods
20, 27. Passive and Middle Voices ...
28. The Particle Ac
29. Final and Object ( Uauses. Verba of FearUuj
PAOE.
1
4
8, 10
11
13
15
17
19
22
24
28
30
32
35
38
41
44
48
52,57
03
05
07
71
73, 75
77
79
IV
COVTRNTfl.
Skction.
n'i.
37.
:is, 31).
«», 41.
42.
4;{, 44.
4r).
40.
47.
48.
49.
")().
r.i.
r\(iK.
SI
84
N.'), 88
01
94
90
98
'I'he Cnnditioiiiil Sentence
Jv with V'erlt.s of Emotion
'I'he liel.itive Pronoun
liclativ*; Adverbs, "Ymx;. Wfuv
Causal and (>oneeHsive (Jlause.s
Expression of a Wish
The Indirect Question
'''•'*' I'"i"itive \m,m^
Tlie Tarticiplu m- ..>-
\'('rl)alH in m«;
Oratio ()l)li(|ua
Oratio < )hh(iua of the Conditional Sentence;
Negatives. [Jsos of ////
Double Ni'^'atives. Or //// and //// oh
Miscellaneous
(J reek Idiom in the use and meaning of Words
< >i(ler and Connection
'I'lie Particles
Exercises 51 -ad
Vocabulaiy
no
IN
no
117
121
122
1 •>n
127
129
i:W-1.39
14.'}
PAKT II.
KxKKcisEs 15ASKI) ON Xenophon, Anabasis, B. I., Ch. i.-viii. 107
SI
84
N."., 88
1)1
94
90
98
10, 103
'.">, 107
no
I, IN
no
ii>i
122
1 >>r.
PART I
127
GREEK I^YNTAX
107
()U\
or
cer
]
it 1
fvhi
-19
defi
gen
con
ELEMENTARY
GREEK PlIOSE COMPOSITIOK
§1.
-THE ATITTCLE
S.
1. There is no word in Greek for a or an; it is simply-
omitted. A woman is yui'r). J Jut wlien a 2^<^rticular pei-son
or thing is meant, thouj-li not named, a or ati (Lat. quidam, a
certain), is ex[)res.sed by the indefinite rts : as,
A cGrtaiib man came,
Note. — The inch^finite r!<r usually follows the word to which
it ref(!rs, and must be distinguished from tlie interrogative ti<;,
who, which is nearly always the first word in the sentence : as,
-t'? €1 ; who are you ?
2. A or an, denoting a class, is expressed by o, r), to (tlie
definite article) : as, ^, g^^ov , ^^c^..^_
An ox h a re7y nseful animal, %p^(^i-^^o'^ , ^ , or .-
O poVS C,lOOV i(TTt J^p-qiTLfJiUiTaTOV. ;J '
3. The distributive a or an {each, 'per) is expressed by the
genitive of o, y], to, or by /ca-a with the accusative— either
construction with or without eKao-ro? : as,
He oised to receive a drachma a day (i.e. each day),
Bpaxfirjv iXafx^ave rr^s ^/xepas (or rrjs 7;/xepas e/cao-TT/?).
Three half-darics a man, rpta rj/xiSapiiKa kut avSpa.
[1]
> Of i^.
./3^
,\^ \^^.^
■^ ^Xi-C^^WC
tk./U
ai,C^y<^-i''\jBi
->7
S>f^
X '*->^
i.'Vn,<»--*''i--»-»-t-^.
To tti/yo'7
■ at
ccyrt
i<*^-* , A^-iPt^ V a,}
2 Er.FMRVTAKV CWV.V.K I'KOSK roMI'OaiTrON.
4. Tl.o artid., M. ia (Jiv-k is i, ,}, ro. Tl, in.irks ol.jrcts,
whrt her frA«.sw, w ,„• hnllrhUalx, as known awl (|<.fitiit(!. Ah tlu;
ICa-lish thr, is l)iib u woalcor form of thai, tlio French /« (/!/*«) of
tlM^ Latin iJ/,, so tl.o Attic arti.-lo i, t}, to, is a w.'akoncd de-
numstrativo, and had in older Creek the power of this, that : as,
This fjirl T will not release, tiju cyw o{, Ai'crw.
This thy courmje will destnnf thee, 0^((rjt ,rc ri o-Ai/ /x^j^os.
Th(> occasional (l(«inonstrativo force in Attic is a survival of
the older usage. (See i:? 4, .'{.)
5. Only ruhis of tlu* mcxst general cliaracter can be laid
<l(>Nvn for tlM^ use <.f the article in (Jreek. A good working
nde is: V,e tU G'reA'. article where the dejimte Article is nsed
in Emjhsh : as, n\^f^c:^ . ik U.X ^ -.*..^<r<* •^'C^J
Ihe men manned all the ships,
ot ai'hiif.^ Ta<i mDs UTratms iTrXrjptiiaav.
C). Greek uses the article where it is omitted in Enfdish in
the fc.Ilowing cases : with (./) rlass^uim^ ■ (h) al> strart lumn ^ ■
••'■•hI ('•) \vM^xii^^^y£mntenal : as, Bvyro'i , y , i>v .. -yy^^yCUi
Man is mortal, 6 ar^pwTros cWt ^i/t^to?.
Virlne is Imiuti/al, r) rl/>err; Ittl KuXy.
Iron is more variable than t/old,
ffLoyi/oos ■i 't^T-tfT-t
7. Proper nann's, from their very nature, do not need the
article. It is n^gularly omitted when a name is fwst intr-o-
duc. in the narrative. It may be used when the name has
ah-.;iia,y l»oen nKMitioncl, or when it is a w ell-know; i na
oven though not mentioned before : as,
Socrat"s s((ifl, SajK^.^rT;? ecfyrj.
^0C7-ates (the celebrated) said, 6 :icoKpdrrjs e>/.
ame.
n<^i/9 , ^^ X tf I « , /7., X V
'^l ^
<X\^^
^. t.
I'HK AIJTICLK. 3
15'it, (h. articlo is ,u.l.,.n.fix,.<I (.. a i.n.p,.r nudiie f..Il..w,.,l l.y
.•Ui.ui4ios,t,.xo <»ilIijiiiii-.ipiivuj4.itluiL wiik tl.aiL.liiii. : an.
Nainos of plan-s sinnd -...icrally 1„.|w(m.u tho nrti<-l,> an.l
words lik(5 rim; niuiniJ lut., utc. as,
The Ls/aH'/ of /Jr/,>s, y) S?iX„<i uJim,<i. 7 V^^O<i r
In pl.rasos lik. 7\> Pharsaln. i„ ThessaJ,,, r,;, Wc.nmAm,
e;ri cha/HmAoi/, tli.^ artido is used witli tho iv.wu, of tho country
'Which generally precedes) ; ti.e name of tho place is without
it.
S. Tlie su})j(>ct takes the article, the predicale do(vs not: as,
The day hvcmno n',,/hf, i^ iyivtro ,} ifu,^,,,t.
Adjectives as well as nouns follow this ndo-even the
superlative, to which the article is an iM<]is].ensal,l,. a.ljunct in
l^:n-l.sh: as, ^ fuv.crc^ <,a^9 ^ / ^
For this proved to he quit, ' tho, (frmtost movement la Uw (Jnek
vnrrld (litei-ally, /;>/• the (Weehx),
KU'-qiTi^ yap aZryj /xeytrrrr/ ^ tuWK\\,j,tlv iyevero.
J. VV hen the subject and predicate are c'oextensire-Axn\ cu-
vortihle ter.Ms, tlH> article nuiy he used with the predicate : as,
The rii'h lore the name of the horse-breeders,
10. A demonstrative or i)ossessive adjective used with a
noun, regularly takes the article in Greek : as,
This mfin was speaking to onr mother,
oiTo? o ai'iip e'Aeye t,J ry/xerc/Kt /xr;r/u'.
Yon took VI 11 shield, not y onr s,
iXa/h'i T»/r t/xi)i' ihrTTiSd, ov ryv ayv.
.'C-a^i^<iu
Lnr7a^ar->rs o
V i -a
^^,^^ .^rx Ae«.,A«-v ^ iLirr
OJC^ .
* ELEMENTARY OREFilK PROSE COMPOSITION.
lUit tho i)ossessiv() p.-ououn is omittod mI.oh tl.o owner is
Parents love their cJdldren, ol yo^e?? a-r^pyova, rk reKua.
Note.— The different ways of expressing, ownerslii., in
ascending order of strength, are as f< ,llows ;
Yo7c took your shield,
(1) £Aa/3es Tr;i/ aa-iri^a.
(2) £Aa/?£v (Tov ryjv rJo-TriSa or r^ a(nriha (xov.
(3) £Aa/?e? 7^1' (nji' dcjTTiSa.
(4) cAa^ts rr;i/ eaurou d(nrt8a.
Exercise 1.
L Tl.e general is loading his soldie.-s against tho enemv.
-. Of the seven sages, Solon was the wisest. 3. Each of y«"u
shallhaveadaricaauonth. 4. l»arius sends fo,- Cyrus ; Cyrus
therefore goes up, 5. Mount Pelion was placed by the giants
upon Olympus. 0. Gold is more precious than silver
7. Amusement is for the sake of rest. 8. The good and the
I.ad must die 9. Cyrus leaped down from his chariot and
put on his breast-plato. 10. You will hurt your head
11. Hor.ses are liandsomer than inule.s. 12. Thucydides of
Athens composed the history of tho war. 1,3. He saw the
general and his army at Ephesus in Ionia. 14. Death is the
best remedy for trouble (gen. y.)
§ 2._0HATI0 01!L:qi;a ok I.vDutECT Narration.
1. An assertion dependent upon a verb of „;yi„j, or tUnk-
,n,j ,s saul to be ,„ „,.,„;„ Mi.,na or huUrr ,u,.-nUum. Tluis ■
lie ,s ,m■^t^,^g, is oratio rr,M or *«.« „«„-«(io„; but / ,«y
ORATIO OBLIQUA. 5
that lie is fvriting, or, I think tJiat he is writitKj, is oratio oUi(pia,
or indirect nari^ation.
2. Verbs of thlvkiHy are followed in oratio ohliquo, by the
infinitive : as,
lie thoiufht that we were not 2)resent,
Notf;. — The negative before the infinitive, after verbs of
thinking, is ov (rarefy iirj).
Verbs of sayiitg are followed either by the noun-clause
introduced hy that (on, <i)s)— the couinion Engb'sh form — or l)y
the accusative and infinitive — the eoninion form in Latin.
The negative is ov.
3. Some verbs of saying prefer the infinitive, others })refer
6Vt or ojs. Thus :
^iq^L regularly takes the infinitive : as,
He says that we will ivrite, Kfirjal ry/xas ypdij/dv.
Ae'yo), / say, and etroi', / said, take on or ws.
[For examples, see below.]
4. After the present, future, and perfect (jn'imary tenses)
the mood and tense of or<(tlo recta follow on and ws without
change in oratio ohliqna : as,
We shall heat the Athenians, h-parryo-o/tci/ rwi/ ^ hBi]va.mv.
They say that they shall heat the Athenians,
Xeyov(riv on Kparrjcrovo-i ru>v ^ KOt^vaiiDV.
After the imperfect, aorist, anil pluperfect {secondary or
historic fensc's) tlie mood and tejise of oratio recta may remain
unchanged. This is called grajjhic sequence. But, more com-
ELEMENTAia- GllKEK PKOSE COMI'OSITIOX.
monly, while tho tense remains ullclla^,^^(Ml, t\w. mood })ecome.s
optative. This is c.-iIUmI historic mjuryir,' .- as,
y7ifi// s(dd that thnj iroithl heat the Athmians,
€t-()v o-t Kpari'imtuv (or KixxTycwvat) to-i/ WOijvaiwv.
T). ]f the infinitive! is used witli a v(m-1) of m>/iM{/, th(! follow-
ing rules niust Im; observed :
(1) The subject of the infinitive, if difierent from that of
the main v(irl), is in the accusative : as,
lie ,s((t/s that the men are (jouxj atvay,
(prjal Tov<i ai/Sptts aTrip-^nrOaL.
(2) A pronoun referring to the subject of tlu; main v(!rb is
omitted, uidess the pronoun is used for emphasis.
But the pnmoun, when used ])efore tlu; infinitive for
emphasis, is in the nominative : as,
He said he did it, ecpy Troiryo-ui.
I/e sai/s that it is not he But the other n-ho is ;jenrra/,
ov (pq(Tiv avros aAA' iKuvov orpaTrjyeh^
(•5) An adjective or noun, used to niodify t]m infinitive, is
att^racted into the case of the word to which it refers :
as,
You think that yon are tvise, ^o/xi'^eis elum m>cfy,k,
0. After ort and ^o, the imperf(>ct and pluperfect of nr^fio
rerfa n>main unchanged in oratlooUi^pnt ; but, if theinlinitive
■s used, the nnperfect and pluperfect arc, repr.vsenlvd respect-
ively by the present and perfect infinitiNv in oratio nhlhjna : as,
Jfe said that th,ey accused hi/n ri(/h/J//,
e\,^€V i'nt <]i>Oi:>^ 7jrtwi'To, or c'^r/ avnw, i'>,>0,:>^ amanOat,
7. The tense of a ^A«< clause in English obli(pie is chan-ed
utter a past tease. Thus : The man is goimj away beGomes^'iu
ORATIO OBLIQUA. 7
past oblique, He said that tJiP. man was ijoimj oivay. They will
write becomes, J/e said that they v;o\]\a^ write. There is no
such change of tense in Greek o})li(jue. Tlius : He said that
the man was goimj aivay is Citc^v on o avi]\) a7r£/);^otTo, or l(\iy)
Tov avSpa a.7repx!^(T0aL. He said that they fvoxM write is eiTrci/
on ypdif/ouv, or ^r] avTovq ypd^nv. Heiico, in turning Englisli
oblique into Greek, the important rule is this : Find first the
tense of the EiujH^h direct ; the tense of the English direct is
the tense of the Greek obliqiie. Thus : He said that the woman
would die, €<prj riju yvvatKa uTro^ai/eto-^ttt [dir'ect = i^ yuj/'^ airoOa-
veirai, the woman will die]. He said that he ivas at a loss,
elmv oTi dTTopotrj [direct = ajropC), I am at a lossX
Exercise 2.
[In doing the following exercise it will he safest to find lirst the tense
of the English oratio recta, as the tense of the lOnglish oratio recta is the
tense of the Greek oratio ohliqua.]
1. I assert that the just man is happy. "J. He says that
the general is present. 3. They said that he saw everything.
1. Cyrus told his soldiers that their march would be to
Jiabylon. 5. He told them openly that the city had already
been fortified. 6. He said that there was nothing more unjust
than rumour. 7. She says thao she herself is Justice. 8. Ho
said that justice was wisdom. 9. There came a messenger
saying that Elateia had been captured. 10. He said that he
had conquered all his enemies. 11. Alexander used to assert
that he was the son of Zeus. 12. Klcoti declared that he
himself was not general, but that Nikias was. l.'>. He
thought that he would see the king and his generals at
Ephcsus in Ionia.
8 EI,[':iVIliNTAl{V (iKKKK PKOSli: COMPOSITION.
i^3.— THE AllTTCLE {Contmued).
1. The.-irticJc! with a, pirticiplc ivfers to ;i definite person or
to ca class, jiiul is eiiuivalcnt to he who, any one who, witli a
I finite verb : as,
He ivho docs, O TT/HITTOJI/.
A7n/ one whi> wishei^, o /SnvXofievo?.
2. Tlie article is used with cardinal numbers to mark a
wliole approximately, or the i)arts of a whole : as,
There died about ten thousand, i\itkQa.vov (ififfA mk /ivfnov^.
0/thc companies three were absent, dTrija-av twu Xi'>x^v ol rpels.
3. My father and my friend's, is, h €>^s Trarvyp Ka\ h tov c^'CKov,
4. To express, He has a very beautfrd head, the Greeks
said, He has the head very beaut ful, KaXXicrrrjv €^^et rrjv K€cf,aX^v.
T). Nouns are formed by means of the article with
(1) Adjectives and participles : as,
The jieople, ol iroXXoL
A chance comer, 6 ~v)^o)v.
(-) Adverbs : as,
The ancients, ol irdXai.
Affairs here, ra irddSe.
(3) A prepositio)i and case : as,
The Goverrwient, ol im nov TTfmyfxdTwv,
Plato and his school, ol dfifl llXiiTwva.
(4) Dependent genitives : as.
The dispensations if/'ortnnr, rn. ryj^i rvxn^.
The remark of Themistocles, ro roD ©e^toroKXcovs.
THF. ARTICLE.
9
a
(5) A word oi- wliole sontence : as,
The icord " /," ro cyox
llie adage " Know thyself " is- tisefid everywhere.
TO yvwOi (TttUTot/ 7ravTa;^or' Vri -^ijcnfjiov.
(G) Infinitives : as,
Hatred, ro /Atcrctr (roP fXLoelv, etc.).
6. In combinations like, 27ie fatlwr's house, a governed
genitive may take the following positions :
(1) 17 Tov Trarpos oiKi'a. (3) r/ oiKta roD irarpos.
(2) ry otKta yj tov Trarpo?. (4) tov Trarpos r} ot/cux.
Bat a partitive genitive is usually found in one of the last
tw(j of these positi(ms : as,
The best 0/ the citizens,
ol /3eXn(7TOt TlOV TToXlTWV, or TOJV TToAiTWI/ 01 jSekTUTTOL.
Exercise 3.
1. The toil of one who seeks, finds everything. 2. The
state furnished two hundred of all the triremes. 3. There
were about eighty companies of the hoplites present in the
l)attle. 4. The children of the general and those of the judge
were educated with us. 5. He who labours most and serves
the commonwealth best, is held worthy of the greatest rewards,
6. We all have a mortal body. 7. The ancients esteemed
Plato and his school very highly. 8. The rhinoceros has a
very strong hide. 9. The nightingale has an exquisitely
sweet voice. 10. To the free, shame for their disasters is the
strongest incentive. 11. The nuiltitude terrify the govern-
ment and greatly disturb affair-s here. 12. The messengers
said that the general would s(ivw_ reach Pergamos in Mysia.
13. The remark of Sophocles, that discretion is something
beautiful, is worthy of all praise.
Ml
10
ELEMENTARY r.REEK PROSE COMPOSITIOX.
5^ 4.— THE AliTICLE ((Uwfnn,rd).
1. The following elliptical phrases are formed with M
article
le
The right hand, r) 8et\a (sc. x^^i')-
The son of Cyrus, o Kvpov (sc. vl6s).
Ptlhiic affairs, ra rrys 7ro/\eo)s (sc, TrpdyfiaTo).
The country of Philip, rj rod <t>i\L7nrov (sc. yij).
The quickest ivay, rrjv TaxicrTyv (sc. o86v).
2. The article is oniitted— especially after a preposition-
with :
(1) The names of familiar objects : as,
To the toirn, to the citadel, to the camp,
€S iroXiv, c's aKfn')iro\iv, e's (TTpaToirihov.
From the heyinniny, i$ apxy'i.
To the tevt, eVi iTKrjvrji'.
WoaJth is for the use of the body, the body for that of
the soul,
TrAotTos froj/xaros cv6/ca cVri, (rw/xa \pvxr]<i.
(2) Names of relationship (father, mother, son, brother,
etc.) : as,
You will be fi(jhti7ig for your wirrs and your childreyi,
fxaxeurOe vrrep yvvaiKwv T6 kul iraiSwr.
(•3) Ba(n\€v<;, when referring to the king of P(;rsia : as,
I/e went up to the yreat king, J)? /?ao-iAea ivifSr].
3. The original demonstrative force of the article survives
in 6 /x€V— 6 Se, the one~the other (inflected throughout: as,
ol p.iv~ol 8e, some -others ; to /xeV-r^i Se', partly partly), in ror
Km Tov, TO Ka\ TO, this and that ; in -rrpi^ rov or TrpoTod ( ^ before
this), fonnerly; and in eV rols TrpC^ro^ or Trpi^rrj (= among those
fi
rst), Jirst of all.
THE ADJKCTIVE.
11
Note. — 6 Se is used for (mi/, he, ovon whon o /acV doos not
fxfu'ede ; but, if kul is used for and, the relative is used instead
of the article : thus,
He called in Athenians and they cavn',
' k67]vai(iv<i l-rr-qyayiTo. ot Se yjXOov. I>ut,
No one opposed and so he acted as <jnide,
EXKUCISE 4.
1. Some iled but others remained. 2. Some he praised but
others lie punished. 3. Some must be fortunate, others un
foi-tuuate. 4. One man gains nothing, another gains much.
.'). He did this and that and not the other. 6. The Athenians
were the first who laid aside their swords. 7. A wolf was pur-
suing a lamb and it fled for refuge into a temple. 8. Homer
in his catalogue mentioned the lar-gest and the smallest of the
ships. 9. And he, riding at full speed, flees from his pursuers.
10. About sunset the general led back his men by the quickest
way to the camp; and they went to their tents. 11. The
(rreeks besieged Ephesus in Ionia by (xara and ace.) sea and
land. 12. The Thracians crosscnl the river Strvmon and
l)lundered Philip's territory. 13. Messengers reported tliat
the enemy's fleet had reached the promontory of Sunium, and
was advancing towards the city. 14. You will fight for the
land in which you were born and the homes in which you
were bred.
§5.— THE ADJECTIVE.
1. Adjectives ai'(^ cither at ( ?'ibutive or predicative. An
affnhiffivr, a(ljecti\-e forms oiu* notion w ith the noun : as.
The
d
good man, o ayafos avrip.
Oo<i
13
ELKMENTAUY OKERK PHOSri; COMPOSITION.
A pry'f/icafive adjective is one used as a pi'cfdicaie or as part
of a pi'edic'at(> : as,
The man, Is f/ood, <> avrjf) (cVrrtv) dya^o?.
The man in called yood, o avr/p KaXctrai dyaOoq.
Tlie attributive adjective is preceded l)y the article and
stands between the artii'le and the noun or, more rarely, after
the noun with the article repeated : as,
The good man.
(1) o (lya^o? avTjp.
1(2) o avijp 6 dyrt^os.
The predicative adjective never has tin; ai-ticle. It stands
either before the article or after the noun : as,
1(1) dya^os o di'rjp.
(-) o di'T/p uya^os.
The man is good.
2. Any word or phras(! may be used with the article as an
Jittribute : as,
The interne/ling time, 6 /Acraf u ;^poi/«)s.
2'he famons Pericles, 6 Trafu X\e.piKXij<i.
He was put to death by the aiitJiorities at Sparta,
StetfiOdprj VTTo Ton' eV AaKeSai/xovL reXdu.
The wall along the river,
TO rii)(o<i TO TTapa tov TroTa/xov. "
3. Two or more attributes may follow one article without
connectives : as,
7V> ilic. other Greek states, h ras aXAas 'EWrjuLKa's TroXei?.
But the article may ))e used with each of two or more attri-
butes : as,
TTttAatU
speech, y Attlkii rj
<fiwvr].
THE AD.IKCTIVR.
13
Note. — Posscssivo {uljoctives, or gotiitivos of n'llcxivtj or
(leiuoiistrative jn-onouiis used iiistt^ad <»t' jtossessive adjectives,
lake the article and i\iv (Ufrihntire position : as,
j\/>/ JrienJ, 6 e/xo? ^t'Aos, or 6 </>tAos o c/xos.
Ml/ ofOi sivord, TO ijxavTov ti(p"?«
This (or t/iat) man's sou, o tovtov (or ckciVow) vtos.
But the genitive of a persnnnl pronoun used instead of a
possessive, takes the 2>redicative positi(jn : as,
Ml/ house, 7] oLKia fiov, or — if otlter words precede —
fxov rj (iiKia.
His J'ather, 6 TruTyfi avruv (or ai'-od 6 TraTijp).
Exercise 5.
1. The wise man deh'ghts in painless pleasures. 2. The
herald cried with a loud voice tliat the famous Pericles was
present. 3. They dismantled the new wall beside the river.
4. He spent the intervening time in momentary pleasures.
5. Of pleasures some are good, others bad. 6. The king de-
ceived the infatuated Olynthians with false words. 7. The
Greeks were twice rescued from the greatest dangers. 8. My
friend saw his slave in the city. 9. He ordered the soldiers
to pile their arms around his tent. 10. The general declared
that he was going against the enemy immediately. 1 1 . He
saw the stranger from Delos on the streets of the city. 1 2. He
said that the good citizen did not seek excessive liberty.
§ G.— THE ADJECTIVE (Continued).
1. The predicative position is taken by :
(1) Adjectives oi position, when one part of a thing is to be
distinguished from another : as,
The middle (f/'the marhet-jjlnce, iian] yj ayofui
14
ELKMRNTARV (iUKKK F'UOSK f^OMPOSlTloV.
Tlir i 11(1 of iho. islait'/, fVr^iiTr/ 7/ vr^fros.
On t'lpfot'^ aK\mi<z rofs iroirtv ( = tlio (^nds (if the feel).
But such udjoc'tivos tako tlio attrilnilivft positioti, wlu-ii oiu;
tliiii",' is to l)(' (lis(in,i,aiislu'(i from anotliei- : us,
Thi- middle miirkct-phice, y fiiny} ayofni
The last island, y hr-^i'mj vy](ro<i.
The ]>i'}'J]>rt cithi'n, 6 a/c/jos TroAtTT;?.
(2) 'Y.Kt'iTipo'i, rdi'h of firo ; a/xc^o) and nfujxWejus, l>i>(/i ; ira^,
all ; and oAos, irhole : as,
/// each of the two cities, iv iKaTt/HiTiJ tto'Aci.
Jloth hands, ufx^jiu) rCo x^^P^-
Both cars, dyu^orepa ra wra.
All the state, iraaa r; 7^oA^s, or »'/ 7roA,t? Trdaa.
(I'ut, The state as a tvJiole, y) murd. ttuXi^.
Every state, Traa-a ttoAis.)
77ie ivJiole race, IWov to yivoq.
(But, A icJiole race, uXov yeVos.)
2. Tlio followin.uf idiomatic uses of tlio jiredicativc adjective
should 1)0 carefully noticed :
The man, if he is patriotic, will henefit his conntrij,
o (h'r]p (l)t\6iruT()L<i Tyv TTo'Ati' oyi^ieXytrei.
TJievntness I produce is a competent one,
iKavov napixop-dL rw fxaprvpa.
The reproach yon, have nttered does me Jtononr,
KuXov fxoL TO fn-eiSo? (ivei'Siaas.
1.
EXEHCISE G.
1. The king, having the (Jreeks in the centre of his empire,
thought he had coiKjuercd them. 2. The maiden's eyes are
very beautiful. 3. The stone that is lun-e is soft. 4. The
3.
t?OVCOHf).
15
isluiul (»f J)«>ln,s WHS ill the ini<l(ll(! of IIk" A'l'^iuinn Soa. 5. 'J'Ikv
I(»\v{U'(mI ili(5 l)('um by loosoiiin;,' tho cliaiiis. G. This was the
<,'n;atost disasttu* (luriiiijf the whole of the war. 7. Every day
they raised the walls higher. 8. He was delighted with the
soldiers because they had fought ])ravely at JVEarathon. 1). The
woids which the soothsayer speaks are false. 10. At day-
break each general led his own column against the village.
11. The fugitives reported that the enemy had already taken
Thebes and were advancing against Athens. 12. The men of
former times delighted in philosophy. 13. Excessive liliei-ty
violates the maxim, " Nothing in excess."
§ 7.— CONCOUD.
1. A neuter plural takes a singular verb : as,
Provisions /ailed, to. cTriTr/Sfia eTrc'Aivrcv.
liut tlie plural is used with neuter nouns denoting persons,
or when the idea of plurality is to be strongly marked ; as,
7Vie mnyistrates ^mt him to deatJi, ra riXr] avrhv aiT'-.KjtLvav.
Many tracks were visible, (fiavepa ya-au l^-q iroWd.
2. A collective noun mai/ take a plural verb : as,
The majoriti/ looted for tear,
TO TrXijOoq iif/r]cfiL(ravTO TToXefXiiv.
The army secured food hy slanyJitirimj thrir horsfs,
TO (TTpoTiVixa iTropLt,iTo (TtTov, K07rroi/T€S rot's ITTTroUS.
?K A plural verb may follow a nominative dual : as,
77/ ey both looked at each other and. laiiyhed.
16
ELKMRNTAF{Y fillFKK IMIOSK COMroSITION,
t. A
rl
Ncr'h \vi
111 s<'vcr;il suhjrcls is .;,'ciicrii!!y phir.il, l)ut it
may a<r\i-i' with the ncjuost .subject or with tlio most proin-
iiu'iit and Ixj understood with th(5 rost : as,
Aristt'Hs nnd Klfon. frrre (/fiwra/n,
uTTparr'iyii 'Apirrrer'S Kin KAcojc.
Tf tlio su])j('cls difT(!r in person, tho verb takes the first
person in preference to the second, and the second in j)refer-
ene(i t() tiie third : as,
Yon and I nt/ree, <rvfx(pMvovfX€v €yo) Koi vfieU.
T). A predicative adjective referring to several subjects is in
the ])hn-al —neuter phn-al, if they an; the* names of thin<,'s ;
l>iit, if they are the names of i)ersons, the masculine is j>i-e-
ferred to the feminine, and tlie fenn"nine to the neuter : as,
Loi'fi, enri/, (md fear are opposfd to each other,
o epws K(u o (pOovo^ Kttt o ^o'/ios ivavTia eWiV.
The husband and wife are (/ood,
o dviif) K(U r) yvutj dyuBot curw.
IJut the i)redicative adjective may always agree with the
nearest subject, or with the most i)rominent : as,
Sedition and war are the cause of onr troubles,
TJ (TTIUTL^ KnX 6 TToXifXOq (XlTto's iCTTL rCiU KUKWU.
G. A predicative adjective is often used in the neuter
singular as a noun : as,
Truth is a beautiful thimj, 7) AXriOeta Kakov lanv.
7. HoXi;'?, much, i'j^urv,, ha/f and super/atlres take the
gender of a following genitive : as,
The greater part of the islarul y iroWy rys ryrrov.
The half of fhe uohK o r//xio-us rov xpvcrot'.
The brar^,^ 0/ the iJreeh, ol ^puTTot r^v 'E\\y]vi^v.
AI'I'OSITIOV.
17
KXKKCISK 7
1. Our wiv(»s and diildt'cn ;irt' t<» ))liim('. *J. Iloiumraldc
.actions ihilight tho soul. ^i. 'I'hc lari,'»'r pai t, of mankind do
not hclicvo tluit this is t* • ». 4. Stones, luicks and hcains
tlirowii to«,'('t,li(!r witlionb order ;i,re ult(M-ly useless. 5. ]!<»
Nvopt when ho saw his mother and liis brother prisoners.
0. A friend is tho most vahial)l«! of all |)oss«fssions. 7. Half
of tho army had already crossed the rivor Ilalys. 8. JVlany
onich'S wore roportiul dni'ing tiu; whoh^ war. 9. .\11 th(!
nations of Asia .sont soldiers to tho army of tho great kin<,'.
10. Demosthones and tlui other orators gave tin's ad\ ice to the
assom))ly. 1 I. TIk; lle(!t weii^died anchor from th(^ island and
saih^d to Miletus. \'2. Poaco Jind war an; l)otli adv.'intagoous
to a country. l.S. liotli you and ho havo sutrered injustice at
tho luiiuls of tho magistrates.
§8.— AiTosrnoN.
1. An ap[)ositive agrees in case with tho noun to which it
is annexed. The iMiglish as hefoi-e an ai)positive m;iy Ix; ex-
pi'ossed by o)s, hut is usually not tninslated : as,
/ prodnci' wy friends as frituesscs,
7ru/j€;(oj Toi'S <}jl\()V<; (o)s) fidpTVita-^.
2. An appositivc; usually has th(; article; Imt when joined
with a participle becomes a predicate and drops the article:
as,
Thft Get(v,, the remotpM of the hdvlmrians,
oi FcVat, oi ar^^uToi (of o'lre? t(T)((iT()t) tmv ftapftapuw.
3. A word may stand in ap])osition witli the genitive
2
18
RLEMKNTARV fiRKEK PROSE COMPOSITION.
implied in a j.msscssjvc ;uI j('(;tiv<! or In ;iu juljectivc! derived
from u j)rop(M- noun : iis,
Retire to your own cities,
/ am a citizen of Athens, the greatrnt of all states,
i. *AAAo?, other, and €Kao-Tos, earh^ are used distributively in
the singuliir in apposition with a noun in the plui-al The
\-erb is usually plural, but may be singular, especially if the
verb follows the distributive : as,
These men say, one one thing, another another,
nvTOL uAAos (liAAo Ae'yct.
7'hese each receiver I ten drachmas,
5. A noun may stand in apposition with a neuter pro-
noun : as,
This particular virtue, prudence,
rovTo ye avro, rj (.v/SovXla.
G. 'AvT^p is used as a term of respect in apposition with
titles and the names of nations and occupations : as,
judges, w ai/Speq htKacnai
A 2>ro2)het, livyp /xairis.
lie first sends to Athens a Spartan, Jfelesippus,
TTpcorov aTrrxrre'AAei e^ rus 'A^ryms MeXyimnroy, ^v8pa
s
TrapTtaryjv.
Exercise 8.
1. Alexander, the son of Philip, defeated king Darius at
the r.N-er (Ir-anicus. 2. Some of the houses had fallen ; others
St. I! remained. 3. J[e sai<l that they would have their own
agam. 4. Every year the government of Eesbos sent to
PERSONAL AND POSSF.SSiVE PRONOUNS.
19
Athens as ii'il)ut('. figliiy talents. ."». S(jcrates the philosopher
was li:«,'hly esteemed because of this very virtue, justice.
6. He said that a shei)herd hving on Mount Pel ion had seen
them robl)ing the temple. 7. Herodotus says that Tomyris,
the (jueen of the Massagetae, cut off the liead of Cyrus.
8. Consider that you are a citizcni of Argos, the oldest city in
Greece. 9. You (h-ove out the man who liad saved your
country, barbarians that you are. 10. licmember, soldiers,
that Sparta cannot retreat from the field. 11. He held that
courage was the greatest of all the virtues. 12. The armies
have all betMi disbanded and dismissed, one to one state,
another to another.
^9._PERS0NAL AND P088ESSTVE PKONOITNS.
1. Th(; noininativo of the personal pronoun is used with
a verb only for emphasis or in antithesis : as,
Yon also shall see him,
Kai (TV 0\^€i aVTOV.
I mocked hut yon jiraised,
cyto fxh' Kareye'/Vacrrx, av oe €7r//v6(rai;.
2. 'Efiov, iix(H, ifxe are more emphatic than the shorter forms
{fjiov, fxoL, fxe), and are the forms generally used after a prepo-
sition : as,
lie, icill stay at my house, /xeret 7ra/> c'/aoi.
3. There is no personal pronoun of the third person in
(ii-eek. Its place is supplied
(1) Tn the nominative, by ihc demonstratives (including
^ ^t', — 'o 8e, the one— the othrr) ; s(!e %\\ \ as,
They allowed their enemies to lire aud shall ve kill them?
eVcij/ot fxev Tuv<i TroXe/xtoU'i ilmy 6'/i , ^f.'i'i ^e airoKTevovnev.
20 KLEMRNTARV GREEK PROSK nOMPOSITION.
(2) In tlio ()l)li(iu(> cdscvs, by ilic ()l)Ii(|ue cases of ahtk : as,
Thri/ killed hoik hha and her,
aTTiKTeiyai' avTOi' re kuI avTi'jv.
A few of them fell in the hatde,
a-n-iOavov iv ry fid-XH avrujv uXiyot rtue^.
4. A possessive pronoun is oejienilly preceded l.v tlu>
<irti(^le : ;is,
Ml/ friend has arrived, r. ifxo^ ,/u'Aos ({(jhktui.
Vnxt, Afri>)td (fmine, e'/xos- ^jAos.
T). Tlie genitive of ll,o iktsohuI ]>ronouii m.-iy be used
insleadof <lie ju.ssessive, Imt takes the predicative position :
as,
Your father is present, ,', tthti'ip aov TrdpvrrLV.
G. Except the r-eflexive a(i,iTepn<;, their (wliicli always refers
to the su])ject of the sentence), tliere is no possessive of the
third person in Greek. Jfis, h.r, its, ^/../r— unless refe.rin-
to the suljject of the senteiice— are expressed by the -enitiNe
01 avTO'i : as,
y'he^j eat of his hand,
He loill destnaj <dl their rdu's,
hia(j)6(.pa. Tramts ras Tro'Aets avTMv.
But his, her, its, referring to the subject of ihe sentence, ;ire
resi)ectively kavrov, iavry^, iavrot, and their is iavriLv, (nf^/repo^
or (.TtpMv : us,
I'AU'Ji one 'Was leavvnc/ his coantr)/,
c/cao-T()9 (iTreActTre TT/r eavrov TrdXu'.
Parents love their chUdren,
oL yoieis 0iXowrt tu lav7u>v T(.Kva.
PERSONAL AND I'OSSESSIVK PRONOUNS. 21
They said that tliey Imd found their slave,
e(j)a(Tau evpr/KcVai tov (7({)iTcnuv BuvXov (or mj)Q)V tov
8uv\()v),
7. My own, yonr oivn (sing.\ his o/vv. and their oion are
respectively ifiavrov, a-awrov, hivTov, and eavTO)v ; l)ut oimt after
otir, your (plnral), their ((n/ieVepo?), is amm', standing in appo-
sition with the genitive impHed in the possessive : as,
Your owti affairs,
ra creavTov irpayfjiara.
We do not speak of onr own achievements,
TO, ry/xcVepa avTo)v epya ov Aeyo/xtc.
(S. So too, any noun may follow ry/xeVepos and vfiiTepo^, in
apposition with the genitive implied in the possessive : as,
The art 0/ you sophists is loonderful,
Exercise 9.
1. You deserted the city, not I. 2. lie feasted, but I slept.
l\. Medon was sent l)y me as a messenger to the council.
4o He killed his wife with his own hand. 5. The}^ asked me
to go with him, but I refused. 6. We must not injure our
own countrymen. 7. He asserted that he was your friend,
but your brother denied it. 8. I suspected my slave of the
theft, but not the sti-angei'. 9. They hoped that all their ships
had l)een saved. 10. The property of you citizens will be
surrendered to the enemy. 11. A fi-iend of mine saw him
and asked him about the matter. 12. Ho thouglit that he
could see nothing dearer than his native; country.
11
-1
oo
ELEMENTAHV (JHRKK PROSE COMPOSITrON.
§ 10.— Rp]FLEXIVES AND AYTOS.
1. llefloxivus of tlio third person .arc of two kinds, dirocfc
and indirect. A direct reflexive is one that refers to the sub-
ject of its own clause : as,
They say that all moi love their oivii,
XeyovcTLV ori Traircs ayuTrwrri ra kavrCov.
An indirect reflexive is one that refers to the subject of the
nic'iin clause : as,
Tyrants think that the citizens are their servants,
01. Tvpavvoi vofJiL^ovirL rov^; TroAira? vTrrjpeTelu eavrois.
Note. — 'Fmvtov is used ;is l)()lh a (hrect and an indirect
reflexive.
2. Besides eauroi', the following pronouns are used as indirect
reflexives :
( 1 ) 01, (T(j)eL'i, (T(bti)i', (T(pi(TL, (r^as.
(2) Any form of avro's : as,
They are afraid that the Athenians will attack them,
fj)o/3ovvTaL I'T] ot WOrjvaloi (T(J)Utlv iTrikOwaiv.
Cyrns heyged Sacas to let him know,
Kvp()<i Tov SaKov e'^eiro (rrjfxaLvetv hvtw.
3. Auro's is often placed before? a rellexive for emphasis : as,
lie has destroyed his own poioe/)^
KaTaX.i\vKe ryv avros ultou ( = etiVTov) Si'vajxiv,
4. IcfiCov avTMv, (Tfjiunv utiTot?, etc., are <^enei-ally direct rv-
flexives. They are more emj)hatic than taurai/ (— ot?, etc.),
and thei-efore often used in antithesis : as,
7 hry/diird /(, recdi/ni-:'. either thmiselns or their j'rie nils,
i^yvo-qirav cr^us re avrov<i kul toi's cVirr/Setous.
UEFLEXIVKS.
23
5. The reflexive is often used for tlie rcciprocil aXXyjXoyv : as,
We converged ivith one another,
G. The following is briefly the syntax of auro's :
(1) In the nominative without a noun or in any case with
one, avTo^i is self: as,
He himself (or the master) said it, auro? e(f)r].
I saw the r/eiieral himseJf, etSoj/ tov (rrpaTrjyov aiiToV.
Note, — In this sense when used with nouns — except nouns
denoting persons — avroq always has the article, but takes the
predicative position : as,
Up to the cAty itself, es awrr/i/ rr/i/ ttoXlv.
But, The king himself, auros /3acnA.ciJs.
(2) In the oblique c;ises without a noun, auTo's — urdess the
first word in the sentence — is him, her, it, them : as.
He (jave tliem the gold,
IhuiKev avT()l<i tov )^pv(t6v.
But, / saw him runnhig aivaij himself,
avTov ccSov aTToSiSpao-Koi'Ta.
Note. — Auros, in this sense, is frequently omitted : as,
They m,et and routed fhem, h'Tv-^ovTc^ atrots, £r/)ci//ai/.
(8) When preceded by the article, atiro? is the same: as,
l^hey came on the same day, r/XOov tFj avrfj y]^^pci.
(4) Lastly, awro's is used in certain idiomatic constructions:
as.
Pericles ivas yetif'rcd urifh three, itfhvrs (^Iniuselj llie Joartlt),
IIc^ikX^s t'yr^jttrr/yet Tcrapros aiiros.
24 KLEMENTAFtY (JREEK PUOSE COMPOSITION.
TJu'jj took four s/iijis, cn-trs tttid al}^
We arc, alone (Inj ourselves), avTot cV/xei',
Jltit let .some one <jo of his onut accord,
aAAtt Tts acros iTu).
Exercise 10.
1. Tlie sanio people? always (.ccupiod Attica. 2. They saw
liiiii ill the middle of the road. ,'}. The same things pain some
hut delight others. 4. Tlie general was killed by Ids own
men. 5. They thought that they should command the har))our
themselves. G. Konon with four others was general in the
battle. 7. Astyages sent for his daughter and her son. 8. He
said tliat he had a slave at Laurium. 9. He said that all men
liked their own possessions best. 10. The Athenians took
two-thirds of the s]di)s, crews and all. 11. I fear this more
tiian death itself. 12. He said that Brasidas had delivered
tlie prisoners to them. l;l They en\y not oth(>r men l)ut one
another. 14. They suirendered their i)eivsons and their arms
of their own accord. 1.5. They answered him that it was
impossible for them to do it. Ig. I believe our city by itself
to be much superior to Argos.
g U.— DEMONSTUATIVES AXH 1)T8TR1BUTIVES.
1. The demonstratives (T^e and o^ros, tJtk, and cVeu'o^, that,
when used attributixely with a iioun, take the article and tlie
predicative positioj I : as,
Thi
s matt, o(Vo? h ih'i'if) uv 1) drill) orros.
I hat road, iKdnj i) o()(')<i or /'/ o8os eKeivrj,
eKCLl
DEMONSTRATrVEH AND DIS IRIHUTIVES.
25
I>ut wlien tli(! iKtim is ;i prediwite or in apposition, the
;ii tide is (Iropprd : fis,
Amovg the Persians this is law,
iv riepcrats vo/xos ccttiv outos.
lie makes use of this as an excuse,
TavTY] TTpocfidcret ^pf/rai.
17ns VMS far the greatest disaster that occurred,
Tra^o? fikv tovto /xeywrrov 8ij iyeuero.
2. Oi'T09 usually refers to something already mentioned,
o8e to something yet to be mentioned. There is the same
distinction between roiouros and rotocrSe, such, tootovt o<i and
Too-oSe, so great, tt^XikoCtos and tt/Aikoo-Sc, so old, ovTw'i and
ojSe, tJiUs : as,
On hearing this he spoke as follows,
aKovcra^i ravra Tou'ihf. eXctCV.
^J^J'OTE. — Toiovros and Toioo-8e, roo-ot^ros and toctoVSc, rr/Xi-
KovTO<i and TT^XiKo'crSc generally omit the article; but, if they
have the article, they take the attributive position : as,
lie remained with the following intention,
There was a marked decrease in birds of this kind,
Twi/ TOLOvT(ji)v opviOwv eVtXen//is cra<{irj^ iyevero.
3. The former is eKcti/os, the latter is ovros : as,
/ 7net Proxenns and Menon. I spoke to the former hut
not to the latter,
oc ov.
\. In such expressions as. That vas a dreadful calamity,
iKean] yjv ^uvrj irvp.<^opa, the demonstrative agrees ^Y^th the
predicative noun.
26 ELKMRNTArjV CUKKK I'lJOSK (COMPOSITION.
J. And that fan, is k(u Taira: as,
lie rendered them more savagr, and thai too towardn
himself,
ayfHU)r€f>ov^ avTois eVotV/rrf, kul ravra ci? avrov.
Ji. Or.ro, is the rr-ulur ocr.vlative cf ,•;,, ,rAo, l,ut i.s itsed
only tor onipliasis : as,
Those ivho wore present I mw,
dl 7rapy(mi; roiVovs elSov.
l5Mt, / m./; ^/«,.v^ H^ho were present. wIhmo tl.e rlenioiuslrative
IS ummiphatic, is e?8o. o^ -ap>,„, or, ,„o,-o usually ,[8
TTapovTa^i,
OV TOV%
7 ToSro and ra?ra aro us.d to intro.luco an emphatic state-
iiUMit : as,
We^ know this, that ve hare nvr arms,
ravra ur/iev, oVt -a oVAa c'xo/^er.
What is this thim/, virtue ?
Ti'TTor' c'o-7-t TOVTU, 7/ apCTlj.
8. Of™, a,„l c«r..,„ i„ all their forms are „so,I, both in the
r ;;:; r: " "'" °''"""'' ""^■'■'' '^^ -"p'-'t-'pronou,. of
tne til in I ])e!'.son : as
lie at least ..iU never fUe, o^V.r. l.dvo, y, c/,.',^^.
Their heads, thr.n, he cat of; the rest escaped,
S,' of a possessive prono.u, take the attributive
y '>^'uiy, .iixi tKure^,o?, mc/i o/ ^/w, when
DbMONfjTHATIVKS AND DISTltinUTIVKS.
2/
usod with a noun take or omit tlio article. If tlioy havti tlic
.irticlo, they take the predicative position : as,
J a each city, iv iKda-Ty TroXet or if kKaary ry ttoAci,
Evenj day, kuO' eKdcrrrjv rjfiepav or k(iO' eK(urT7/r t7;i' rjiUpav.
10. "AXA09 (Lat. alius) is aiiother of ma/tiij ; h^fio^ (T.at altrr),
another of two: as,
The others, the rest, ot dXkot.
The opposite pai-tij, ol eVepoi.
The rest of the arm//, to dWo o-Tptirccjua.
The other of the tivo armies, to e'repoi' a-TfmTevfia.
11. The following examples will illustrate! some of the idio-
matic uses of aAAo? and its compounds :
(d) Some were rich, others poor,
aAAot fikv TrXojjcrioi yjcrav, aAAoi oe 7reVr/Tt?.
Sometimes 1 ate; at other times J fasted,
uAAore iikv yjaOtov, dXkoTe Sk eTrctVwi'.
(/') Some imnt one vay, others another,
uAAot dW.Y] (i7rr)X.0ov.
Different things pleased di/ferent persons at different
times.
aAAot? uAAoTc aAAtt c8o/c€i.
(r) TJiey crossed yet a ffh river,
?)iefS7](rav ttI^tttov TruTdjxov aAAoi^.
('/) 77ie Lacedaemonians and also their allies invaded Atttct,,
ol AaKeSaLiJ.oVLOt Kal ol aAAoi avfXfiax^ot icTef^aXov es rrju
' At TLKrjv.
(e) The If saw many other imuders,
eiSov TTokXa KUL aAAc)!, Oiw/ia-a.
L'8
KLEMENTAUY (ilMJCIv I'liOHK COMl'OHl'l ION.
ExKurisic 11,
1. Evciy iiitrlit (lie l);irl);ii'i;uis (Icscondod from tho liills jiiid
.•ittfU'kod this colony. 2. Tim opposite jjiirty seized tho citadel
;uid o\('r;i\\ed the ivst «.f the citizens. :;. This tho poets tell
w ul^■s.
I. 11(5 WHS welcomed by tlu!
ns, th.'it l*e<;-asiis Ii.mI
citizens and also hy the strangei's. a. Home spoke the truth,
others r(;fused t(j confess. G. This country is so fertile that it
is pleasant to live in such a rei-qon. 7. DiU'ereiib tln'ri-'s are
thought beautifid in diilerent places. 8. I have seen many
other cities, but Athens is foremost of all. 9. The rest of
(h-eece was subject to Athens. 10. llio fleet and the army
arri\ed at Naui)actiis, tlie former by cruising along the coast,
the latter by maiching across the mountains. 11. In tho
midst of the asseml)ly he saw those who had arrived from
Sanios. 12. The Greeks marched with Cyrus, and tliat too
against the king of Vwshi. ]:]. After Gorgias had tlius
spoken, the envoys addressed the assembly as follows.
§12.— THE INDEFINITE TI^.
The indefinite -is is either adjective or pronoun, and is used
in tlu^ following senses :
(<t) Some, any : as,
///i" has daw (my harm to anyone, ha has been pm wished,
€i Ttl'U Tl Ij'dLKIjKe, K€Ka/\(XOTUt.
{!>) One, people, they : as,
People hate him, /xia-u ti? tKavov,
One ivill not find a iviser man,
o^X ^vpr](Ta 7-is dvBpa cro^wTe/ooi/.
,.3
I
'IIIK INDKFlNlTi: TI2.
29
I
i
p
(r) IL.vt' (111(1 there o/n' : as,
Of' fliosc fjidf, ircrt' killed, one here and llure perhaps
ivas irleked,
T(i)V ([Tr()6(iV('>iTi,n' tfro)? TI9 yv 7roj'r//)()S.
I^OTE. The passive of aTroKTeu'to (/.vV/). is iWoOin'urKU).
So too, llardljj aiii/, rj ns y oi'Se/'s : as,
Thene, men, Jaii'ii spoken, htrdhf a iroi'd oj trvth^
ovToi y] Ti y) ovBiv (tX-yjOh dpijKmTiv.
{(I) Some (jreat one : as,
Yon hoast that ijoit are soniehodij, ai'^^fi? "t? «'»''" [§ 2,
5,(2)].'
{r) I mujhi say (with adjectives and adverbs. Lat. (jnidam),
The place is, I vih/ht say, hard to seafe,
O TOTTOS 8t'o-^a70S Tt9 tfTTtV.
So too, /xt'ycs -IS, hn;/e ; owSct's Tt?, 7io^ a single one.
Exercise 12.
1. Hardly a man escaped. 2. The chiniaora was a huge
and dreadful animal. 3. Many have suil'tn-ed wrong at the
hands of the governor. 4. Some say that the half of our .ships
were sunk in this sea-fight. 5. Those who boast so much,
appear to many persons, I might say, to be ^ somebody.
G. Every ignorant man is with(ait friends. 7. Nothing else
causes so many wars and seditions. 8. Ignorance is the most
terrible of all evils. 9. Wealth brings many advantages to
those who possess it. 10. A boy is the most insolent of wild
i)easts. 11. He thought that every man ought to be simple
and true. 12. The rest of the blessings of this life are derived
from virtue. 1:5. Tiie man who is to be gi-eat must love
neither liimself nor his own. U. The gods pitied the human
rare and ordained them a rest fi-oni their labours {(jen.).
30
KLKMKNTAKV (lUK.KK IMIOSK (((Ml'O.SlTHtN'.
i^ i;'». -iNTMiiiiodA'rrvi': koiims.
1. 'riit» coiiiiiKMi iiit(M'i'(»Lfiitiv(^ pr'oiiouns and adverbs ai'c
Who? Ti's ; W/iir/i nj' ihi', ln'o'f Trt'nijut'i ', lloin yre.tit ? ttoVos ;
(in tli(i ])Iuial, lliiir mani) I) What k'nidl ttoios ; Uotr old i
TT/yAtKos ; IVhr/'t' / TTor ; Whenci'. ? rzoOer ; W'liifhir ? tti'i.\ WIu'u?
TTore ; llovit ttois or rr/.
!i. The coinuiMii intci'i-o^ative |)artielos ar<' : ?; oi" d,ja (sliiiply
aslciiii^f a (lucstion ) ; ,T/)' or (expect iiii;' the aiiswci- )'r.s) ; iTprt /xj)
(expectiiii,' the aiiswci- .\'o) ; as,
h hf sick? yj daOeiys eVrir ; (Lat. Ac(irotatne ?)
Is lii' iKif sirk ? uj) ovK (urOei'i'jii iiTTLV ;
(Ijat. ^y<>)tin' (U'l/rcfdf ?)
Ill- l-< iiiif sK'k, IS hr ! ujuL /<;y dirfttvy^ irni^ ',
( liaL. .\ ///// (Wijrotitl ?)
!UU. the iidU- (tf iulerrogaLioii (;) alone, often serves to mark
a <|uestion.
'^K Tnst(>a(l of ap uv are used 7/ ydp, ovkow and dWo tl y ; and
>; TTuv, {xy and fxwi' Qiy ovi) instea<l <»f ilpn /< i/ : as,
Voii Jiari'. (lone this, harr i/oic nol ?
y 'yup ToSc irt.TTuLyKa'i ;
SiircJij iri; do not prrsuade the i/ods uj'Uh (jljh, do we ?
fXMi' Tov<i Beorq Bw^uts iruOofjiW ;
\. Whetlicr — or (Lat. tUrum. — an) in a doiilih; direct ques-
tion IS TTttTifHiv- — y or dpa—y : as,
Wheth')' irill they folio w Cyrus or not ?
TTOTipov €i//orrat Kiyjco y ov ;
NoiK. — Oi' at the end of the sentence; is accented.
INTKUKOCATU i; FOKMS.
81
f). Tt fiaOu')i', trifh irlmt 1 ntntfinti. iiwd ti iraOwi', nndir icluit
nt/liicnri', iirv often used fur //•////; as,
117/// '//'/ //"" '/" if / Ti' finOun' TdVTd. eVon^rru? ;
(). All iiilcri'oiiiitivc iiifiy he joined t<» a |>;u'tieiplo : as,
W'lmt shnll irc (li> l<> succeed?
TL TToioDiTC? Karopddnroiiii' ;
7. A <lcni()!istrativ(! may Ix- j<»iiie(l [n-edicatively t(» an iiiter-
I'oj^ativo : as,
What WUO.S is this you hrimj^ rt to8c dyyiWu<i ;
S. )'rs Of Xo, ill answor to a (luestion, is oxpressed by re-
peating soino Us'iding word iu tlie ((uostion : as,
Do yon, SCI'. m»' ? Yes. a/xi /xc o/>^r<} ; o/)w (or eytoyc).
(A"o, would be ou;( ofm or ot»K €y(i)ye).
Stronger' forms for Yfs are jKiXuTra, irdvv filv ovv (ccrtniiily),
Trm yuf) uu ; [of coiirs"). Stron,i,'er forms for Xo are ou6a/xu>5
[by HO means) and r/Kiora yc (Ayw< of all).
Exerci.sk 13.
1. Was not this the tree 1 Yes. 2. Surely he is not wrong-
ing you, is he ? .'5. lltiw many (»f the hoplites were present in
the battle 1 4. AVhat kind of man did you think him to be?
5. Which of the two is the stronger, necessity or desire]
G. Hosv did you not waken mo at once i 7, Did you do that?
Certainly not. 8. Whether have you said it or not? 9, Who
are those people I see? 10. Are ye not all brothers? 11.
What shall W(^ do to recover our former freedom? 12. Has
not every man countless myriads of ancestors ?
32
ELEMKNTAUY CREEK PHOSE COMPOSITION.
I
§ 14— TI[E GENTTTVE.
1. Tlie fun,U.n(.nt.;i] nol\un ..f Uw -enitive is 7nothn frum
2. Quo nn„n iu the geaitive is a.l.lr.l attributively to
anotiier to cxjifcss
(1) J'ossessiuii : as,
7%; sophists' art is wonderful,
y TWl/ (TUcfiLa-TWU T€X^Uy ScLVl'j iaTLV.
To Phar sains in Thessaly,
T7}s ©ecro-aAias eVi, <i(lp(Ta\or.
(li) Tiio u'hnh- of ..hich the governing nouii denotes a part •
as,
//« is a man of the p, pie, Av/jp i^rc rov Sr)f,ov.
Tliis is callcl the parfUhy </emtive. It is used after parti
tives, numerals, superlatives, and neuter pronouns used as
nouns : as,
Sensible persons, <>l cj^p/n't/xot rm. <\vOp^^uyv.
None of the Greeks, olSeU 'EXXynoi:
He rvas the hest of the orators, aptaro, ?,u to., fhjropu.,
^ Tosnchapitch of foil ;; did the., rise, c'. r.Zro iroia. ^jXOuv.
(•>) Quallti/, material, amov»t, etc.: as.
He 2cas a man cf great consideration,
dvrjp yv fieydXav u^ioy/xaTo?.
A crotvn of violets, aTecjmvo^ iwr.
Ajournetj often days, hUa ,)^eplhu 6SoV
(4) The snlrject of the action implied in the go^•ernin-
noun : as, °
/ e7ijy the good-will of the jMople,
Ti]v evvoiav rov ^fiov i^u).
This is called the subjective genitive.
THE OKNITIVi;.
33
(5) The object of ilici action iiiii)lie(l in the governing noun:
as,
Tlte ft'ii-V of (IcutJt .si'hed him,
TO Oe'09 TOU OaVlLTOX) t'A«/?CI' aVTOV.
This is called the ohjectiva yenitive. Additional examples
are :
Ewoia To)v c^iAu))', affection for fy'iends. Arms Oavarov, deliver-
ance from death. 'ATrofrrafns tCuv 'A6'//vato)F, defection from tJte
Athenians. *H(rv;(ta (.)(Bpm', rest from enemies. 'H Trpoa/SoXij
T>}s StKcAta?, the approach to Sivihj. O 7rc'Ae/xos rwi/ (drjl^atoju,
the war against Tliehes. 'A^op/xr; epywi', stimidns to action.
EfSeta )(jp7]ixaTU)v , need of money.
3. The ^^rice at which a tiling is bought, sold, or valued is
expressed by the genitive : as,
At ivliat price is he selliiuj them ?
TToaov avTu. TrwAet;
/ would hny liberty ivith my li/'e,
T^S i/'7;;(>}s Trjv iXevOeinai' irpuLLfiqv uv.
4. Time when — when the time is indefinite — and time
ivithin which are expressed by the genitive : as,
/ ivill go aivay hy night., aTret/xt vvkto%.
He will ')iot fight for ten days, ov /xa-^aTaL ()iKa -rifiepuiv.
5. Many adverbs of place, time, an<l manner govern the
genitive : as,
Where in the world ? ttov tt/s y>}s ;
Late at night, 6\p\ t7J<; vvkt6<;.
Advanced in years, iruppu) Trj<s r/AiKias.
Three times a day, rpU t-t/s yixcpas.
To he in one's right mind, tv ex^u' <pp^, mv.
As fast as they (•i>nhl, cov tfi^ot/ raypvi.
This genitive is partitive.
3
34
•ELEMENTAUY GREEK PROSE
COM POSITION'.
I
^>. 'I1m! toIl.,\vin,i,r udjoctives govern t,i.(3 geuitive :
(1) Adjectives of p/mf.,/, want, find raJ„e : as,
h[f" ixfM of care,, rc\ 'C?jv /.e.rro. ^tn^yriHun' urrlv.
He is In need of Utile, eVScr/, cVr. t,,K,n>v rt.09.
^\'orth|/ of honour, a^'tos rt/xrys.
(iM Verl)iils in i^o? : as,
CapahJe of 2^erforming j„st actions,
{'■'>) CV)nipounds of ,i jn-ivative : as,
IJe has no j^oiver over his tongue,
aKpaTij<i yAwcrcrr/s eVnV.
7. Exclaniatioiis are often followed l.y the -enitive
as.
King Zeus, ivhat impudence /
Exercise 14.
1. Tl,e god, «olI „s all .,„,. lA..,»i„„, .,,, i,„ .^.^ „f |.^,,^^_^
-. Ihey made tl,,.,,- l,„ys capable of co,„,„a,„lin.. m,u :! W-,,
.» the ,.ougl„..t of all tead,e,..s. 4. He .,id that they h.'ul
. hberty fo.- a hte of ease (u'.n. „/;,„„). 6, Thei,- halved of
At ens was the cause of the war. 7. It is the easiest thi„„
" the wo,.ld t„ deceive oneself. ,S. Tears ave not a ...ned';
;■■ i?"'''"- "• ^'': "I'' ' i.^ twice in his life a c
0. They are not ,h need of a rule,- or of a leader. 11 All
the.se flowers bloom in the siMin" ]•' He s.,id fl fl ,
on.er the. to prepare p!.o.:io„.:-fo:^h::X:(^^^^^
andourpre^ent.:,;:!':'''''"''""'''''' '"■" *'"'■- '^Hm-ss
THE ni5NITIVE.
35
i^ 15. —THE (^EN'TTTVK {(Umtinned).
The follow! 11!^- verbs govern the genitive:
(1) Verbs followed in English hy from ^ oj\ (dtonl : as,
Th'ij shall ceasp, from their labours,
TrawrovTai tCiK' tcoi'mv.
It is not the. fiiiii'. to sjuiah of this,
ov KdLjxU cm A-eyetF toitojf.
Jin ilcjtrirrd tluv.n, of their city,
l^ut the prei)ositions are often used : as,
y^iCf/ did lint ti'll the same story ahoat the same rrei/fs,
ov ravTa ( = ra avra) Trepi tmv aiVwi' kXeyov.
("J) Vei'bs whose action affects only part of the object : as,
/ ivi/l dritdi' S())ne water, Triofiai {'oaro?.
yV/c// chiw.) to safrfi/, ei)(^i)vr() t>}? (ronijpLa^.
They shared in tin' spoil, ixcrel^^ov Trj<; Aeaxs.
Xoi'P^. — ^These verbs often take the accusative of lh(> whole
and the genitive of the prtrf : as,
lie loill take yni by the hand, Atyi/^erat ere t>'}? ytipo^.
(o) Yer])s meaning to hit or ')niss, aim at, obtain, make trial
of : as,
He airnnd at one thiny and Jilt a)ii)fher,
dWov rrro^dint/zeros enj^^ei' aA..\o)j.
J/e missed the mark, yiunpre rov (tkoitov.
To obtain iiid.nh/i'nee, -Dyyaietr fn)yyr(o/.a;5.
Tlvy can yet ai'itlier fxA nor sleep,
orre itltov ovre v-yov ()rvavT(a Xay^^av€LV.
Thry made an, aflrmp/ npon fin' wall,
iireipdaauTo rod rct^ov?.
i r
30
KLEMENTARy T.REEK PROSK COMPOSITION.
(4) Viivhs of p/ent?/ and iva»i : .-is,
They loaded tJie shl/> vifh tlinher,
iye/xtcrau rr/v i-ai'i/ ^l'Aoji'.
His booh are Jul/ of such diseussioits,
TO. /SifSXia avrov ye'/xet rC)v rmnvrow Aoywi/.
Far from it, ttoXXov 8el (a wanf.x much).
Almost, oXCyov Se? {it uruds litt'e).
I need money, Seofiai xiivy-'irm:
But verbs meaning tojil/, also take the dative : as,
The army ivasjilled with sorrow,
TO (TTpdT€v/xa iTrkyaOrj dXyu.
(5) Verl)s relating to the senses (excejjt sight) : as,
They never tasted liberty, o.Vore iyevaavro ry, i\evOe,nac.
I smell gold, muppaivoixai rov xpvfrov.
Note.-Ako^,, / /.^«r, generally takes the genitive of the
person and the accusative of the thing : as,
/ hear a cry, /Sorjv cIkovco.
I heard him sinyiuy, vy/cowra avrov rtSoj/ro?.
(0) Verbs relating to the action of the mind: as.
To understand (av.lyf,,), perceive (alrOavof^ac), rememb.
0.e;x.,;/.aO, forget (i:nXa.O,i'of.,u), desire (i^rcOv^Ao), de.nis.
{Karatjipovew), care for {Ky8o/iai).
/ do not remen^ber the nam.s, ob /.e)..>;^a. ri. 6.of.iro.v.
They did not desire empire, o{,k i^eOvf^yjaav Ap^^j-.
(i ) A^erbs that inij)ly com2)arison : as,
To be superior to (.ep.y.V.o/xa. or .e,.a/u), be master of or
hold (Kpareco), be inferior to {y)rTdofxac).
lie conquered us, -eptey^uero ^/fiCn'.
r
n
^/■-
THE GENITIVE.
37
(8) Vei'l>s of accusing, arquittimf, and condemning : as,
They accuse him oftlieft,
lie was tried for treason and acqidtted,
T^S TrpoSotrias €(pvy€ koI aTri(fivyK.v (0evyu), i.Jlee,
2. 6*? « defendant).
KaTT^yopeo), I accuse, and Karaytyi'ojfrKd), / condemn, take the
genitive of the person and the ace. of the thing : as,
They accused hinri of impiety,
Karr/yopr/rrav avrov T7/i^ aaijSetav.
= They spoke impiety against him (kut avrov).
IViey condemned him to death,
Kareyi'wcrav avrov tov Odvarov.
= They judged death against him (Kar avrov).
(9) Verbs followed in English by a causal /or, on account
of': as,
/ I'uvy you for your rvisdom, ^tjXC) o-e rr]<i orj^Htts.
(10) The verb to be in the sense of to belong to : as,
Seamanship is a matter of art, to vavriKov rix^'iq<i Icrriv.
To be ones otva master, kavrov eii/at.
This idiom translates the phrases, It is the part, duty,
mark, characteristic of: as,
It is the jMt't of prudence to remain at peace,
rov o-ojc^povds ecTTtv ■f]o-vxa(nv (lit., of the jjrudent man).
Exercise \o.
1. Such a one needs nothing. '1. ]\[ost people listen with
pleasure to abuse of others. 3. It is in any one's power to
find fault. 1. The poor imagine that all men despise them.
38
KLJiMF^NTAIlY (ilJKKK PrKtSE CO.MPOSITfOX.
5. Some they coudomnod to oxilo, others to death. G. Tlicy
would not even tuurh his hand. 7. He said that he was
liohhn- a wolf by (ho ears. 8. They will exclude the enemy
from the sea. 9. He will i-„1) them lirst of their freedom and
then of tlieir lives. 10. Thoy said they would try the life of
virtue. 11. Ho n.nxu' for<,.ot th(i friends of former days.
12. War is not a matter of arms hilt of ',.>-. >y. I:], Is it not
likely that the best counsels will emanat. the best men?
I I. it is the proof of a oreat general to cou.iuer the enemy in
tlu^ tw'ld, lut of a greater to make a good use of victory,
l.-). This day will be the beginning of sorrows for HeJlas.
.^ K). -THE DATTVl^].
1. TIh; fundamoufal notion of the dative is rest at or
CO nil net con ivltJt.
2. The English t<> ovjhr is usu'dly expressed by the dative,
except after verbs of jnotion (,^ 22, 7) : as,
He ijavepny to the armi/, /urrdou 4'8o,Ke t<Z crrpanp.
Ever?/ man hihours for himself Tras ^.vy]p ahno -novCi.
Every tyrant is hostile to liberty,
7r«5 Tiymi'i'oj f.xOp<k arri -p iXevOepia.
Misfortune is eommon to all, to ^.^orvx^iv Kotmu icrrc -jtayiv.
It is at J the same to us, ofxotou ianv y)ixlv.
^. V.M-bs followed in English by with usually take the
dative in Creek : as,
Fight with (^dxop.aL), meet ivith (kvrvyxdvco), be aagry loith
{ylZop.a,),fi,dfaMHiriih (/xe>,^o^a. or eVir,,/x«co), char<,e with
(eyK-aAe'o,), associate with (ofXiX^o>), confer with (d, Ao'yov? c?/xi)
make a trmfy with (.^iv^,a,\ aijroo. with (.VoA,.yco,), be
deh<jht,:<l with {ydu/iai).
TIIK DATIVK.
30
So too, On. r<pial frrms (Ik tov "trrov), thr. samp, as (6. airos): as,
They were on equal terms 7vith its,
iyevovTO ck tov ktov rjfuv.
Thpy fvere armed ivlfh the same an)is as fJi/rns,
(OTrkuTOrjcrau Tol'i avTol<s Kvpw ottXols.
[. The following verbs also govern tlio dative :
(1) I ni personal s : as,
ft concerns all, ttuo-i TrfMrty'jKa.
Yoa may he happy, c^cfrrt o-oi ev^tufiovi elvai.
(2) To be in the sense of to hcloiiy to : as,
Cf/rus had a larye palace, Kvpu) yjv /3aa-tX.aov /xe'ya.
(3) I'se (^aojLtat), trastt (Trio-TCi'aj), obey {TreiOofxat), folio?/!
(cTTo/Aat), eit,vy ((pOoveu)), please (u/jeo-Koj), assist {(SoyOeo)) :
as.
Envy follows virtue, o (jjOwo's cTrcrat rfj apery.
TJiis 'pleases the gods, toDto d/jeVKci toi? ^eots.
5. Cause, manner, and instrnmeut are expressed l»y the
dative : as,
]fe did it from envy, 'lirpa^ev avro (pOovw.
It happened in this tvay, lyive-o Tot'-w rw rpoTro).
lie hilled liim loith a sioord, airiKravev avrw irubei.
i
So too, in { = in respect to) is expressed by the dative : as,
Strong in body, hwaro^ mofxarL
6. The dative is used to denote; accomjHitumciif, l)ut only <»f
military forces : as,
He took the field with a large force, ia-rpaTeva-e ttoAAw iTTparu).
So too, They took three ships, cre/vs and all,
elXov Tpei? vav<i aurots di'Spdatv,
This is called the dative of accoinpauimeitt.
V
40
ELKMENTAIJY GRKliK VllOSE COMPOSITION.
7. A dativo is .'.(Ided to oompanitives and superlatives U,
define the de-roe of difrerence: as,
Much (/renter, rroXXio fie{U' (lit., h>/ much).
He was older hy a year, ivmvri^ Trpecr/SiW^po^i 7/r.
Tliis is called tiie dative of difference.
8. The agent after a passive verb is expressed by the dative
instead of hy 1^; and the genitive, with
(1) Th(^ perfect and pluperfect passive.
{'2) Verbals in reos : as,
This has been proved by vie, tovto SeSr/Acrat' /xot.
yo7c must go, Wiov larC crot ( = it must be youc by yon).
'J. rm. ..7..r.-when the time is definite_is expressed by
the dative : as, ^ j
He came on the third day, ^X6, rf, rpcrrj ^/.epr^.
10. The dative of a personal pronoun is used to denote that
the person to whom the pronoun refers has some special
interest m the action of the verb : as,
Attend to this, pray, Trpcnrexer, vovv rovro^ /xoi.
Who among your friends is dead ?
TLs tCov (piXmv TiOvqKf. (VOL ;
This is called the ethic dative.
1 1. The following are idiomatic uses of the dative : '
On the right as one sails in, iy Se^uJ iaTrXeovrc.
If yon wish to hear, d o-o. l3ovXop.L icrrl. Akovuv.
lu myjndgmmt at least, ok y ifMol Kptrf^.
I have nothing to do toith you, ovSkv if,ol Kal act.
Exercise 16.
1. They held that a man wis nnf !».... a ^ • t- >
1 • / '^" ^^'^^ ^^<>t '^f>iii for himse t init for
1.- eount-y. 2. You we.-e ia tl.e «a™e .laco ,. he was. I
THE ACCUSATIVE.
41
An. exile's property V)elc)ngs to the state. 4. Men often err
througli ignonmce. 5. lie died of the pLague in the fourth
year of tho ^var. G. Preparations have been made by both
armies. 7. In my judgment at least, her brother is much
more skilful. 8. We have nothing to do with him. 9. Has
the stranger departed, pray? 10. There is a town on the
right as you enter the gulf. 11. People said that the Thebans
were approaching with a large army. 12. He thought that
tlie king would fight with us on that day. 13. It is the part
f a good citizen to consid(>r what is expedient for his country.
o
11. He will follow the customs of his own land.
i^ 17.— THE ACCUSATIVE.
1. The fundamental notion of the accusative is motion to.
2. Many intransitive verbs become transitive when com-
poundcid wath a preposition : as,
Cross (Sia/Satvo)), coast ahnuj (TrapaTrXim), transgress {irapa-
(Saivo)), avoid {i^LarrafjiaL), j^f^'^^ue (/xcVci/xi), run atcay from
(diToStSpacTKo)) : as,
l^hey crossed the river hy night,
Tov TTOTa/xov I'VK-os 8uf3y]iTav.
Our ancestors never avoided danger,
ol Trpoyovoi oimrore. e^eorr^crai' Kivhwov.
3. Many verbs and verl) phrases that are intransitive in
English are transitive in Greek : as.
Guard against ((puXdrTofiaL), sivear hy iop.vvixi), feel confident
ahoat {Oappiui), feel shame hefrre (<uVrxiVo/Aai), fed reverence for
{aL^iop-aL), feel alarm at (0o/3eo/xai) : as.
He swore by the gods that he felt no fear (f death,
wfxoae Tous Oeov<i Oapp^iv rov ddvarou.
^2
KLEMENTAUY (iKKKK I'HOSK COM Cos I'll O^.
4. Tlio a(lv(.r]).s ,7;, yp.s, h>j and /xu', ^^o, Ay are toll(nvp<l ),y
*u; aceusutivo : as,
}V.s', Ay .^T'/^.s', rr; roi/ Ai'a.
iVo, Ay fhh Oli/mpus, fxa toVSc 701/ "OXvfjiTrov.
5. Verbs moahin- ^o ask/or (aiVeo.), a*^ a r/?t6.s-,5M,M (eV,o,Ta'.„),
^ (eVS^, or cV8,;o,), .vay o/(Uyco), do to (ttoUw), take two accusa-
aves in the active, and in tlie passive tlie accusative of tlie
4iing : as,
Mmif/ ask me for food, iroXKoC ^i^ alrou acToddiu.
lie teaches the hoys nothiny, toU TrarSas ovhlv SiSuctku.
They deprived them of their sfcords,
a(fi€L\uv avTov<i to. $t(f)7}.
They say the worst thiu'js of each other,
a\\y'jX()v<i TO. (.(T^ara Aeyofcru'.
lie did great injury to the country,
ptyo. TTjv ttoXlv kukov i-rroLrjo-ei/.
They were deprived cf their swords, acprip^Orjaav r^ $io,j.
NoTE.-Even verbs th. ', govern the dative and accusative
may take an accusative of the tiling in the passive : as,
lie was entrusted with the office, cVerpaTTTy r^jv Apx>)v.
6. Many verbs are followed by an accusative of kindred
form or meaning : as,
Theyfouyht a battle and won a victory,
P<iXV^ ^pii-X^cravTo KoX vU-qv iviKr](rav.
lie 'Was sick with a disease, ^Kape yAo-ov,
This is called the coynate accusative.
TIIK ACCUSATIVK.
43
7. Tho accusfiti v'-o is joiiml to nouns, adjoctivos, and verbs,
t(» limit oi* (IcliiK! their nieanin;,' : as,
Thnj iverc, Grcoks in name (nili/,
"EAAr/i't? 7)(Tai' TOtn'Ofia ( = to nvoiia) fiovuv.
He ivati hantlfiome in i)er)«)it^
KdXos y}v TO (TMfxa.
What sJiall I do with him ?
n aiTO) ;(p/(ro/Aat ( = us to what shall I us(! him?)
This is called tho accvsatiir of Innitatlon.
8. An accusative; is often used as an adverb : as,
Greatly, /ie'ya (or fxeyaXa) ; /or the most part, ro irnXr' (or -a
ToWa) ; at last, re'Aos ; at all, (l/>xvi' ('ift^<''" '^ negative) ; in th's
/rai/, Tovrov tov rpoirov.
9. The accusative is used to denote (Inration o'' time and
extent of space : as,
He remained there Jive days,
ivTUvBa e/xeivev ry/xcpas ttci'TC.
J*lataea is sevetittf ftirlonc/s from TJiehes,
EXKUCISE 17.
1. Truth will at last prevail 2. They will teaeli him this
art. 3. He hid his hire, from us. 4. Has he not had his
office taken from him 1 f). 11iey were })Ound hand and foot
{aec. pi.). G. I will put my own cloak upon him. 7. The
cavalry crossed the mountains in the middle of winter. 8. This
truce lasted three whole months. 9. In this way you will
live the best life. 10. Guard against your own friends.
11. The great harbour is forty furlongs from the city. 1*2.
Many slaves ran away from their masters during this war.
13. He did not conceal his opinion from the country. 14.
'^ KLnMKNTAKY (iKhlKK I'UOSK roMPOMTION.
'I'iK'y sui.l lliat, III,. s|;iv(. wjis hy (Icsccnl ;i Ly.li.iu. I .j. Tl,,.
Afclicniuns uII(.i;,m1 tluit tiicy wen. torili.. most, purt uiKud,-
thoiioiis. |(i. They Ii.iv(m|..|. rived (,iir ;illi«.s (,f lilxTtv. 17
It is iM'ttcr lo nil in ImkIv tliuii in mind.
5^ i8._TiiK riJKPosrrrox.
1. The mruiiiiii,' of -i i.iv|M,sit i.,ii is l;iri,^,.iy dctormim-d l,y
the fundamcMtuI notion ot" the ciisc tliut, follows it.
'I'lnis, mtpals />rsh/r; iMit, rrapi t,w 7r„Tn/xov \s from {Ix'shf,)
Ihr rirrr ; Trya ro) 7ro7<i//f,, „f tlw rn-er ; TT'lpa Toi'Trora/im', (o ((,r
itlinHj) the river.
2. A veil, of motion is often followed hy a preposition of
rest, and vice verm a verl) of r(«st by a preposition of motion :
as,
He 2)ut it in oar hands, Wj^k^v avTo y'/fxlu iv xe/K/tV.
I/e .stood beside the pillar, Ittt) irafui Tyr nUmi.
This is called the pregnant eonstructlon of tli(> i)reposition.
rUEFOSITlONS WITH (JlOMTIVK.
3. The followin<; prepositions govern the genitive oidy:
(1) WvTi, instead of : as,
y/« hennne a slave Instead of a k'nu/,
SouAos iyerero ^vrl /?a(TiAe<i)s.
{'!) \\TTo,from (from the outsi.le of) .- as,
//e came from, the city, r,\Oeu Att^ ry^ ttoAccos.
Thpy fought on horseback, A<p tTTTrou ifxaxouro.
(3) 'Ek {ii, before a vowel), ont of, /row, on : as,
I/e drijc. ihrin ont of the conntry,
ryAutrej/ u trots Ik tt/s yy j<i.
Tin; ri;i:i'()siTi(>N.
46
TUi'if hpt. f/if j'i'asfjroia that titm',
Till'// wiU he oil' e(/tt(if turms v)Uh us,
(4) WiU), hcjori', in prc/arence f(> : as,
I/i'. sfnnil hf/orc the house, hrTij tzih) tov oikoii.
lU'forf, this war they elferfrd iiofhlui/ ;/r>'<if,
I will not honour matt be/orr //i<' trnth,
av^jiu. ov Tifit'idtti irpu T^s dXtjOeLWi.
(5) "Ai'cu, icitliont : as,
He is (/one (>(f' nnthout us, o?;!(«r(u avcv yfxCjv.
There ivere ten thousand hoj)/iff's, ajmrt j'rotn those in
the garrisons,
jja'pLOL rjtrai' oTrXirat acev tC)V iv rots 0/K>v/>tot?.
(('») "V.vtKa,for th>' sake of (put after its case) : as,
Ifajlaticrs the tyrant for (fain,
K()\aK€V€t TOV Tvpavvov fWiOov ertKa.
(7) "F4-«), outside of: as,
T/ir hultle took place outside of tin' walls,
7) /x(''x'i7 iyivira e^tu to)v T€i)(u:v.
(?) McTdtr, hr.fween : as,
Jt luas about ton years betn'pe)i this date and that,
iiiTa^v TOVTOV rov -^fjiovov kul Ikuvov err/ ^cku ixdXurra yv.
{[)) Mc'xpt, as far as, until: as.
The ground sloped right up to the city,
TO ^wfuov 67riKXii/es yv {J^tXP'- '"^/^ TroAeo)?.
Until this time the baffle was even,
fXtXfit- TOVTOV TOV X/XH'OV T/ //(I'x'/ IfTO/J/JOTTOS ijV.
46 EiitlMENTARY (JKEEK PUOHE (^OVU'OSITION.
(10) WXr'iv, a.fccpf, : us,
^(> ou" u-</s jj/rst'ut except me, ovSeU -n-apyjv ttX^v ifiov.
Prepositions with ].)ativi;,
4. Tho following prepositions govern tlie dative only :
(1) 'Ei', in. ((() Jn, at (of place or time) : as,
27tere was at this time in Athens a lar<j<> suppJij <>J
young meu,
ei' ToiTO) raJ XPWi^ iv rat? 'A^ryi/at§ tto/VA;/ rcoriy? /}i'.
The Spartans loere defeated at Lenctra,
ot AaKehaLixovioL ivLKrjOrjo-ai' ir AevKTf)oi<i.
(h) On : as, On the right hand, on the left hand,
CI' oe.ti(j., ei/ aptarepa.
(c) Arnoiuj : as, Jfe is honoured a/novg gods and men,
n/xarai eV ^Jeots re Kiu. di'dpo)TroL<;.
{'2) ::iiV ($6v ill old Attic), mith, along tcUh : as,
//e 7('as educated with his brother,
eTrutOa'ero avv tm avrov dSeXi^poj.
Theg managed his a fairs vnth justice,
7(L avTov eirpacav avv ru) Slkulii) ( = 8t/cat'(os).
Von, ivill do it to your own, advantage,
crvv TM (TO) dyaOo) ttoo/o-cis tovto { = cum co/ninodo tno).
Prepositions with Accusative.
f). The following prepositions govern the accusative only :
( 1 ) '\v,'i, up. (a) Up : as, Up stream, dvk poov.
{'>) % (distributively) : as, JJy threes, dua Tp^h.
They marched at the rate of five 2)arasamjs a day,
dva TTivre Ttapatrdyya^ rrjq rjfiepaq cVopei'oi'ro (§14, 4).
77if>y stood in companies of one hundred each.
avu iKaTov ta-T7}aai:
TIIK PI? K POSITION'.
47
(-) Ei> (fcs, ill Thucydides), Into. («) Into or to: as,
lie threw h tinsel/ into tlte fortress,
iariTTca-ev cs to (pfiovpivv.
IViey sent hitii to Athens, iTre/Juf/av avrov c? tus 'A^^yra;.
To the loiver tvorld, es AiSou (sc. oo/xov).
7'o the temple 0/ Zeus, cs to Atos (sc. tepov).
So too, 77ie ambassadors spoke before the people,
ol TTpeo-^cts fXi^av e? rov Syjfxov.
(/>) Towards (of feelings) : as,
7'Af?2/ had friend/ 1/ feelings towards both,
iwoiav etjj^oj/ c<» a/x^oTcpoV?.
(f ) ^1 ^, ?</)0'/i ." as,
7Vie ship touched at Sanios, ■// vaD? eo-^^cv e? lS(t/x.ov.
T^/i^y made descents upon the island,
u7rol3d(Ttt<i es ryjv vrjo-ov cVotr/frai/ro.
(d) At, on (of a point of time) : as,
They came at danrn, h rrjv eio yXOov.
They will arrive by the third day,
a^fii^ovTaL €? Trjv rpirriv r]fi^.pai'.
(e) For : as.
Prepare for tear, TrupatrKcva^err^e cs tov ttoXcijov.
lie did not spend m,oney on any other pleasure,
ovK iSarrdva ets uAAt/v Tii'd yjOovriv.
(f) With respect to, for : iiH,
He is con,ypicnousfor virtue, ^uKpipn es apeTTijv.
(y) About (with numerals) : as.
They killed about eight liundred, SucjiOetpav i<; oKTttKoo-toixj.
(3) 'lis, to (of persons only) : as,
They sent an embassy to him, irpeafieiav iTre/xij/av u)S avTov.
48
ELEMENTARY GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION.
Exercise l.S.
1. A thick darkness ]ian«j^s in front of truth. 2. He is a
Vuni among slieep. 3. I was deceived in you. 4. ][e di-ew
them up on tlie plain, f). They came to liim four at a time.
G. They brought the city to terms. 7. You sliall know in
time.^ 8. Tliis history lias ixvn composed as a i)ossession for
all time. 9. They came to Argos with ai-ms. 10. Was he
fortunate with respect to his children? 1]. They kil](>d all
the ambassadors except one. 12. They carried ev(>rythincr
from the lields into the city. 1.3. You ate fr<,m the same
table. 14. Shall we sail up the river? 1.^). He hid the gold
in the earth. IG. They deposited the spoil in the ten^ple.
17. They used waggons instead of a rampart. 18. He will
do anything for praise. 19. Few out of a hu-ge number were
saved. 20. They had war instead of })eace. 21 He rrave
them pay for the fleet. 22. They did not receive him intc^the
city. 23. They fought a battle before the gates. 24. It was
a])out one hundred years from that time. 25. It was about
fifty years between the retreat of Xerxes and this wai' Of,
He sent them to the king. 27. Honour your parents b(^fore
all men. 2,^. Nature without education is blind. 29. Remain
with us mitil evening. 30. Without leaders nothing -r(>at
will be ejected.
'O to'
§ 19.-THE PREPOSITION (CorUlnned).
Prepositions with Cknitive am. Accusative
The following j.repositions govcTn both the genitive and tlu^
accusative :
m
1. Aiu, throuffh.
(1) With genitive. (.0 nro.ah (of plac and time): as,
Jle went throuyh the ranks, JjXOe Sui r^v rd^t^v.
THE PRKPOSITION.
49
;l
TJieij rr.maliK'd then', tJiromjli llie irhojr. niyht,
Sia oXt;s r>}? vwktos t/xetvuv aurov.
So too, 7%e_y were angry with him, 8t' o/^yf;? cl^"'' auro'/.
(/>) Through (of the secondary agent) : as,
All this they did through your instruvienUdlty,
iravra raiTa iiroupTav 8ia (roD.
(c) yl^ rt distance, at an interval of: as,
At intervals often hatt.hmev.ts there were towers,
8ta SeKtt €7r(Ji/\^€0Ji/ TTvpyoL yja-av.
They kept the feast every fifth year,
TTiv kopTi]V iwoirjcrav 8ia 7re//,7r-ou erou?.
(2) With accusative. On account of: as,
All this they did on your account,
Trdvra ravra tTToirjiTav ota ai.
Why did they escape unless through his delay ?
8ia TL airecbvyuv d fJ^ij Sui tijv fxiXhjatv avTur.
2. Kara, down.
(1) With (JENITIVE. (a) Down from : as,
71iey leaped down from the clijl's, rjAavTo Kara not' Kpi^^iVMV
(b) JJown upon : as,
Ife pours icater upon his hands,
{'Sojp KaTax^tTat Kara Twr ^etpoiv.
(r) Against : as,
'fhey spoke all manner of evil against me,
Trai^TOta KaKh. e'AccUi' Kar e/xoi'.
{d) Down into, beneath : as,
lie sank into the sea, Kara tii<; ^a/Vcimrr/s KareSi/.
(2) With accusative, (rf) Dou-)i : as,
Down stream, Kara puov.
50
elemi:ntai{v cukek vuosk composition-.
(/>) Doirii alotni, orrr, throKtjh, In, (of place and ti'mo) : as,
By sra and Jand, .vara y?jv kuI Kara OaXaamiv.
They wander over the city, TrXavCwTat Kara rijv ir^Xiv.
There n'err jio.opJe in the fields^
ai'OptDTTOL yjmiv Kara roii? dypoi'?.
y/ns fcas the most important event thai occurred dnrimj
the icar,
- »•-() Kara tov itoXcjxov jxiyurrnv eyeVero (literally :
occurred as the greatest thin;/).
(r) Orer^ against, at („f place and tini(>), contemporary
nnth. : as,
Theyfmuiht opposite the camp,
f-ju'i-^ovTo Kara to (JTparoTreSoi'.
7'hey assendded at the specified time,
(rvi'tjeirav kutu toi' ^Ipijfxivov ;(/)oroi'.
lie was contemporary u-lth me, kut e>e ^z^.
(d) According to, with refrrence to : as,
According to Pindar, Kara UcvSapov.
7'hey sent one hundred ships in accordance with the
terms of the alliance,
CK-aroi' vavq eireixij/av Kara rijv (rvfMfjLaxtav.
So too : To the lest of one's ability, Kara hvvafxiv. Puhlic
affairs, ra /<ara r,),/ TroAir. Military affairs, ra Karii 7r6XefjLov.
To take by storm, iXeiv Kark Kparo,. To retreat with all speed,
Kara tux"^ dvaxujpilv. Probabbj, Kara t'o eiKik.
(e) To be compared with, in jjroportion to, for: as
This is not to be compared with tnat,
TOVTO OV Kur' €Ke?l'U icTTtv.
The^ arms were too many for the number of the kdled,
Ta rrXa ttXuu} yirav i) r.ara rows veKpov<i.
Tiir: riiKPosiTioN.
51
(J) A'/ 'll«t.i'ibutivoly) : jis, Oh' hij one, k'Ji' an. Dailf/,
KuB' ijfjiepav. Gradual/ ij, Kara ijllk()6v (little by little).
3. McTft, tvifh (of closer connection than aiV).
(1) With genitive : With, on. thr side of: as,
They Jon (jht fcith its (tyainst Thebes,
fxeO' yjjJiMV ifJLa)(^i(Tai'T(> T(HS (")!/] ftuLOL'i.
They iron tlieir empire, n-ifh yrent laJioiir,
fxeTUL fieydXtDV ttovmv rr/r ''f'XW c^Trycrat'To.
(2) With accusative : After : as,
7Vw7/ arrived after the battle, dt^tKoj/ro fxera ryi' n-ax'l^''
i. 'Yttc^, above.
(1) With riENiTiVE. (a) Above: as.
This spot lay immediately above the city,
TOVTO TO ^(OfnOV £K€lTO VTTep Til's TToAcwS €v6vq.
(b) Instead of: as,
They 2^ lit slaves on the ships instead of themselves,
huv\ov<i h Tus vav'i ijStlSaaav VTrlp e(tvT(7)i/.
(r) On behalf (f, for : ii^,
They incnrred danyer for us, iKiv^vvivov v-n-ep-ijpMV.
{'2) With accusative: Above (of measure) : .'is,
He ?ras snperior to all in. sfrcnyfJi,
vTrep Trarxtts rjV rf] p^'J/^J/-
7'his is quite beyond 'tis.
TOVTO TravraTracnv vTrkp ly/xa? uttiv.
Exercise 19.
1. Dead men, as Plutarch says, do not bite. 2. The oklcr
men are now on our side. 3. That was beyond his strength.
4. He is not honoured on. his own account, but on account of
52
KLKMKNTAIIV GUKKK PROSE COMPOSITION.
the (listiiictiou of liis ;iriic('.stors. 5. 'I'liry will not 1)(« so /cil-
ous to incur (llul.^'('l• for others. (I. J.'ctook many ships during
the voyage. 7. JI(; is willing to die for his country. 8. They
threw tliemselves down from the wall. 9. Th(;re is a liarbour
just above the ridge. 10. They lied througli the city. 11.
llaiii fell througln.ut the nigiit. \2. On this account they
were sailing across the sea. 13. Six hujidred ta]<>nts came in
je.'irly. 14. Things at tlie greatest distance an; most admired.
15. I wish to take counsel with you. 10. The battle will
be foi- country, fi'eedom, and empire. 17. They were saved
through your instrumentality. IS. He was the most powerful
man of his time. 19. Others were .scattered over the rest of
Greece. 20. After the second in\asion they wer(> angry with
Pericles. 21. They .sat down by twos and threes. 22. He
loft nothing untried against mc^ 23. These islands lie over
against Euljoea. 24. I will reply in his stead. 25. They
poured water upon our heads. 20. As far as he is concerned,
the day is already won. 27. After this, they ravaged your
fields. 2S. He lived according to nature and his own judg-
ment. 29. Individually and collectively they assented. 30.
That was a calamity too great for tears.
§ 20.— THE PREPOSITTOX (Confhn>,<l).
Prepositions with GExrTivi:, Dative, and Accusative.
The following prepo.sitions govern the genitive, <lative, and
accu.sative :
1. 'A/xf/n', about ('rarely with genitives or dative in prose).
With AwnHATiVK : A ImuU (of numerals ;= ct^, l)ut usually
followed by iho article) : as,
7fr /(-((s ahoitf ji/tif i/rars (,l,( wlwu ho died,
y]v 076 eVeAeoVa a^tfi ra TrevryKovra hr].
TIIK I'ltEPOSITION.
53
/.(•.•.l-
S<), too, with iiaiiies of persons : Jis,
Plato aiifl his school^ oi ttju,f/)i llXarajva.
2. 'F.Tri, on.
(1) With GENITIVK. (^r.) On: as,
Tlicre wci'o, tnanif ironudi'd incih on tJui ships,
7r(>\Xoi TjMtvfiaTttu yjirav iirl rwv vedv.
(J)) Over, in charga of: as,
Those at the ]i>'a<l o/ajfalrs, ot eVt tu>v TrpayixaTMV.
lie romahied ut the coniniau'/, e/xetvei/ eVi rrj'i apxV'^-
7'hese islands lie ojf' Chios,
aT'rai al j-fycrot Keu^rut tVt Xlov.
lie rednecd <dl the parts on, the honlct's of Thrace,
-avra ra irrl &i)(iKr]^ KaT€(Trpei//(iro.
(,/) T(f ( = oii to): as,
Thei/ sailed to Samos, eVXeiKrai' eV). S(t/xou,
((') //// (with rcllexivcs) : as,
l^hetj lire hi/ thnnsrlres, c'c^' kavT^v oiKovaiv.
( /■) Di'i'p (military term) : as,
I/e drew them vp three deep,
8terai'aro avTov^ Itti rptoJi'.
(f/) />\7'''/'e ( = oorain) : as,
lie stated on oath, hforc irltncsses,
exTTCV €(p o;)K<)V irrl fidprvpaiv.
(h) la tlw time <f: as.
In the days of on.r forifithrni, irrl rwi/ Trpoyovwi'.
(/) J/'frr (of iiaiiiiiiu) : as,
J/e is called after iii'', KtuXijraL eV ifiou.
i>4
KLKMKNTAKV <;i;KFK PHOSK C;0MPO>SITI0X.
(j) On. the oi-nis'nni. of, af ; us,
YoH. hive shown, mo (jooil-irlll of. vnnn/ fnals
evuoiav ei/^eSe/p^^c fxoi eVt voXXun' ayMutoy.
(2) AViTii DATIVK. (a) Oh: us,
The C((,mp was on the mountain,
TO (TTpaTOTTihoV CTTt 7(7) ()j)iL rjV.
Many 2)ride theniselres on. li'ujh hirlh,
TToAAoi /xeya (fipovoixnv irrl yaei.
If I', drank iralcr n-ith It'ixj'ouil,
£-t Tw o-iTO) {'Soj^j eTTirer.
((;) hi till' power of: as.
We shall he in the klwjs jtower,
yevrjO-UfieOa cVi /3ao-t/\et.
('/) /n : as,
77/Yiy ouight him in. the act,
i-TT avrocfiMfm avrbv eXafSov.
(') With a rieir ti),for: as,
We are allies, hat not for the enslavement of Greece,
(fip/xaxoi icrfiev dAA.' orK iirl k xraOouAoWei rrys 'EAAaSos.
(,/ ) On ■•on(litio)i : as,
77iei/ capitnlated on. the foUonnnfj terms,
(Twifiijaav i-Trl TotaSc.
(.".) AN'iTJi ACCUSATIVE, (a) Upon (niter verbs of motion) :
as,
l/e mounted upon horseback, Avifirj Icji' ittttoi/.
{l>) To.- as,
The road lewis to Susa, ^ l^Sos r'^epet eVt SoiVa.
^ So t(...: To the ri;/hf, iA ?>e^ui /n both directions, cV
illifi^orefm. To eMojyerate, iir\ rh p^a.^ou Koafxdy.
TIIK l-KKPOSITloCo ^^
(r) As Jar (is : as,
Their territory reaches doien, to tJie sea.,
r/ yrj avTiiiV Ka6rjK€i liri ttju OdXwKrav.
(<l) A(/((insf : as,
77iey marched agaiiist tlie. P(»rsiaiis,
iiTTpdnVirav ctti rous lle'p(ras
(e) Over, for (of place and time) : as,
Over a wide space, i-rrl ttoXv (or for a loug time).
They ravaged the contitry for the space of teti. days,
e'rtr/ow ri/v' yy}V eVt Scku 7y/x€/)ai>
( f) For ( = in search of) : as,
He went o^' to procare another army,
o. [lapd, hcside.
(1) AViTii JEXITIVK. (a) From: as,
They came Jrom the king, yXOou irapa /^amXew;.
(A) JJy ( = vTTo) : as,
They are filled loith fvisdom by hi))i,
tt}s (TO(bia<i Trap avTov TrXrjpovvTai.
(2) With dativi<;. (a) At, near, among : as,
He tvas educated at 'my lionsc, eTraiSevdrj Trap' ifivi.
They remained tiear their ships, rrapa raii; vavcrlv e/xeii/av.
So too : At the court of (yyrus, rrapa Kvpw. Before judges,
Trapa StKao-Tuts.
(Jt) With : as,
j'hey had great infine'Kce tvith him,
fiiya ibvvavTo irap aoTio.
;)()
KI.EMKNTARY (iUKKK PUOSIi; COMPOSITION.
(f.') In thi, vH)rks of: as,
hi the. tvorks of Homer or of Vlato^
Trap Ofir'iim rj Trapa IlXdrtovi.
(3) With ACCUSATIVE, (a) T'o ( = to ])e.si(l(>) : as,
77/,«_y sfi)d amJxiHsadors to him,
TTi
'n€<r/3i
€(,9 €77C
fxypav Trap avTuv.
s/t
hi ii'fi.
Tlip}/ (•(imc irlfli'ni, a I iff In ofpurishhig,
TTdjHL jUKpln' yXOou dTToOavetv ( = to beside a little).
So too : /le almost escaped, ~apd /xiKpov ^le'^vyci/. To be
jKrior.hi/ far, Tra/ju, ttoXv ireptyeve(rOaL. To esteem as littlej as
7i(>/hni;/, rrapd fUKpov, Trap ov^kv TtOidOat.
(It) Heijimd, contrary to : as,
T/iat teas beyond his strenyth,
TovTo ijv Trapa SvvafJiLv avrw.
Many thinys happen eo)itrary to expectation,
— oAAd ytyrerat '.apd Soiav.
So too : Undeservedly, Trapa. ttjv a^t'm/. In violation (f the
, TTUpd TOIJS fO/JLOV*),
(f) lie Hides : as,
It is somethiiKj else besides all these,
krepoi' TL e'trri Trapa Trdvra Tavra.
(d) In comparison n-ifh (=prae) : as,
In comparison loith the other anima's fee lire as yods,
Trapa ra uAAa ^oja ws OeoX /^toTCt'o/xer.
(') Because of, owiny to {= along oi^ : as.
It was owiny to yoa tJiat this Jtajypened,
Trapa (re tovto eyerero.
(j') Ihiriinj, at the time ly' : as,
Jfe did not accuse me at tJie time the crimes were committed,
oh Ka-n]yop,]ijf.v i/xov -apa TaOLKi'j/uirti.
I
TUr: PHKl'OSITION.
KXKIUISH 20.
57
1, It was not. so In my <l;iy. 2. We can do it l)y our-
selves. 3. They lust aljout a thousand nion. 4. And on
the present occasion the o[)inion naturally pnnailed. ;"), Will
they act in violation of the tn^aty? C. This gold they used
for their own safety. 7. JVrany pride themselves uyion their
wealth. H. Comp.ifed to wisdom, everything else he counted
as nothing. 0. I have lived among you during .ill my life.
10. It will be in their power to attack us. 11. This has
happened because of his careh'ssiuiss. 12. You put up at my
iiouse. l."5. I went to him for the interest. 14. lie mounted
upon the wall. 1-"). Tlusy carry h)ads upon their heads. IG.
Cities flourish in time (>f peace. 17. They made atUdavit
I (('fore the j udges. 1 <'^. 1 le was restored on specifuid conditions.
19. God will not accept gifts from the wicked. 20. Unex-
pected success makes us fools. 21. In the days of the first
kini^s the city rose to a great height of power. 22. He shall
1)0 named after his father. 23. This is true even in extreme
cases. 24. They went on board and sailed away home. 25.
I I extended over the greater part of the earth. 26. It was
(lone for your good. 27. They marched against the city.
2S. They shall have strength sutHcient for their labours. 29.
They were scattered over the country in sciarch of plunder.
§ 21.— THE PREPOSITION (Coniinucrl).
The following prepositions also govern the genitive,,
dative, and accusative :
1. llcpi', about.
(1) With GENITIVE, (a) About, for: as,
We are not contending for equal stoJcPii,
ov Trepl Twv l(tu}V aymn'C,6^i0a.»
68
ELKMKNTAUY (JUKKK PROHK COMI'uSITIo.V,
(A) Ahoiit, iom'rrtihKj : as,
1 shall he compelled to speak ohoiit vnfself]
avay KiUTOt'nTufiaL irtfu. ifiavTov Ac'ycii^.
(<•) ]Vifh rei/cu'tl ft) ; as,
So the vKilfer stood irllh Tejjard to this nj/'ahj
niTWS «""X* Tf^H TOVTOV ToD 7rpdyfJL(lT()<i.
(d) Ahoitt, wm'th: as,
The Spartans valued discipline hiyhh/^
ni AaK€rtai/i fu'iot Kt'xrfiiti' 7r€/)t iroXXov tTroLovvTO ( - con-
sidered it about an important matter).
So <(70, with mne^o-Oai : More hitjhhj, Trffn rrXtum)^. Most
hff/hit/, TTcpl irXiuTTov. Above everyt^liKj, 7rt/>i Travros. Little,
TTtpl. oAiy<ju.
(•2) With dattvk. For (with verbs oi/earinu) : as,
Thrif fraredfor the safety of those withont,
re/H Tots €^u> (L^u(Tav.
(."'.) \ViTJ[ ACCUSATIVE. («) .l/voyt^, avouiid, near (of places
and time) : as,
There should he sentries around a ninip,
(fivXaKaq Set irepl oTpaToVcSoi/ eti at.
Ahout the first sleep, irepl rov irp^rov virvov.
He happened to be near the plaee,
^TV^^ TTtpl TO ^MpiOV 0)V.
So to(. : JJe busy with something, eii/at irept n.
(b) ]Vilh regard to, affecting : as.
They htive made a mistake that affects themselves,
V/mpTyKaa-i irepl iavTovs.
2. llptk, hefiore.
(1) AViT[i (JEXiTiVE. {a) Torvards, in the direction of: as,
They are encamped in the direction ofOIynihus,
(TT paTOTrSfxovTaL Trpu<i 'OXvv6ov.
Tiii': rui;i'()siTioN.
50
as.
(li) JU'fhrr, in thii eye.i oj : as,
'rhiH is just in, the eyes even of I In- (/o'/s,
TovTO ^iKaiof t(rrt mii tt^os toU' Otun'.
((') A'y (ill adjurations) : as,
/ hi'srrch }/t>n /ii/ f/ir (Jinfn, tt/jij? (re hn'iv tKercro)
til
>t' til
)r(m<)
till).
(Notion
(if) (hi flir shir of (of (Icscont) : as,
On f/ii'j'nihi'.fs svlc he is an Athmlan,
\\(}Yjvau')'i i(TTt Trpos rov narpo^.
(c) On til'' sii/r i>j\ /or fh>' ailvantnif of: as,
This Inn' is for fJir iidvnnfn;//' of lln nrh,
ovTa<; o v()fii)<i tt/jos t<>>v 7r\i)V(ruov iiTTtu.
(/') Frinn, at the hands of; as,
We snffered shamefnl treatment at i/onr hands,
(7) Like : as,
It is like a icoman to do if,
TT/jos yvvaiKOi etrri tovto ttoulv.
{'2) With DATIVE, (a) Hear,- as,
Theyjhnijht a sea-Jiyht near the shore,
{!)) Ujion, : as,
Thcij do not fix their minds njion nn/itirs,
ov Trpos rots ovac (from to oV) t^i' ?>La\'»i.av t^^oviTw.
((■) In addition, to, besides : as,
///, addition to this lie. n-ns blind,
TT/JOS TOVTOa TVipXoq TjV.
60
KLEMF.NTARY GREEK PllOSE COMPOSITION.
aim
M
(I?) With ACCUSATIVE, (a) To: as,
They advanced to the ra7H])art,
i^(!ip7](rav 7rpo<i to Tei)^^o<;.
(h) towards: as,
7'his island lies towards the nortli,
y^?)e. rj vrj(TO<; Kcirai Trpos apKTOv.
(c) A;/ainst, in reply to : as,
They fouyht against hhn, iiroXe/xtja-av tt/jo? avrw.
This reply has been made to him,
-avra Trpos avrov €Lp7]TaL.
(d) With I after verbs of ayreehig, etc.) ; as,
They made a treaty with him,
(TVTfnSas iTrotr'jcravTO :rpos avTov.
(e) With respect to, concerning : as,
/// has 'iu>thi)ig to do with Dionysus,
ov8(u 7rpo9 Atoi'Vtroi' icrnv.
So too : Duties towaj'ds the gods, ra Trpos rovq ^eor?.
Military affairs, ra vrpos tw 7roXe/xoF.
By force, -n-fih^ /Suir.
(/) With respect to, for (oi imvY)Ose) : as,
77iey are suitable fur the present purpose,
LKavd i(TTt 7rpo<s tijv Trapovcrav ^puav.
8f» too : To speck so as to please or anger,
Kiy^LV TTpo<i i)8oi-i]v 7] Trpo'i opyrp'.
(g) With respect to, accordiiig to, in view of: as,
They deliberated in the light of their jyresetit circum-
stances,
Trpos TO, irapovTa e/SouXetVavrc .
THE PREPOSITION.
61
(A) (U>mparvd with ( - with a reference to) : as,
(Jomparrd with their reputation their power was
small,
Trpos TO K\eo9 r) 8uva/Ais avr^v /xtKpa r/i'.
(i) fn consequence of: as,
In consequence of the message he dehtyed,
Trpos TO dyycX/xa aveax^v.
3. ' Ytto, imder.
(1) With genitive, (a) ?7ric?er, beneath: as,
T'A^re are co?*r«s beneath the earth,
8tK(io-Tr//)ta eVnv t'Tro Tf/s y^?.
{},) By (of the agent after the passive) : as,
/ wa^: ',vronged by you, y)SLKr'j6r)v vno aov.
They were overwhehnned by the calamity,
evtKt'jOyjcrav {itto tov kukov.
(2) With dativk. Under, under the power of: as,
The wild beasts are under the dominion of man,
TO. 6qfna viro Tots ttt/^pwTTOts tVnV.
You tvUlfall into the power of the king,
yevrjcreaOe vnb /SttcrtXct.
(3 ) Wrrii ACCUSATIVE, (a) Under (of motion or extension) :
They inhabited the acropolis and the part ^ beneath it,
oiKrjo-av tV "KpoTroAtv Kal ra vn a^Tryr.
(/>) About (of time): as,
Abont the same time they sent out one hundred ships,
I'TTo TOV avTov XPOVov eKUTov vaU e^Vre/^i/zuv.
2. Prepositions in « ompositio.i, when tlH-ir meaning reniains
as.
I
(V2
ELEMENTAHY OREEK PROSE COMPOSITION,
uii('li;iii,i,'c(l, o()\(>ni tlic same case as out of composition ; i^tl,
liowt'Ncr, usually govciiis ii<»t the genitive but the dative: as,
It /.s" ten ftfr/<)7t(/s from the city,
TJte piles rose ahove the sea,
oL (rTo7.)^oL VTT€f)€a-xw Ty<s 6a\{UT(T7]q. But
llieij held out (Vjainst Mm, avria^^ov aurw.
Exercise 21.
1. It is like the Spartan character to j)r(^f(;r ])r'evitv. 2,
Do they fear for the safety of the placed .'). ]Ie fixes his
mind on something else. 4. Tliere are villages towai-ds the
I'^ast, West, and South. 5. We were the first (g 48, 5) to
resist tJKMii. G. They were at peace with us. 7. Father
fought against son. 8. Wherefore were they angry unless in
conseciuence of their defeat ? 9. AVhat is it useful for? 10.
Compared with it, all else is iu)tliiiig. 1 1. They fell upon the
enemy at once. 12. He came at night-fall. \:\. They de-
layed near the city. 14. We were sui'rounded by tin; eiuMuy.
IT). Jt is not laige at its source. 16. I have heai-d nothin«-
about., him. 17. He considered honour of no account. 18.
Not for all the gold ])eneath the earth! 19. It was not to
their advantage to attack desperate men. 20. Evervthin*' is
judged according to the result. 21. He was mad with drink.
1'2. They escaped to tlie camp. 23. With rc^gard to that, I
am at a loss. 24. They wei-e reconciled with one another.
2."). He biought the country under his dominion. 26. The
contest will be for the nol)lest prizes. 27. I beseech you bv
your parents. 28. jMany ships were present in addition to
our own. 29. His acts do not correspond with his words.
30. It does not concern nie.
TIME AND PLACE.
63
§ 22.— TIME AND PLACE.
1 Time when-v^hen the time is indotinite - and time within
which are expressed by the genitive, ^vhether ^vith or witlu.ut
an attribute : as,
Flowers bloom i7i the t<pring, ra avOrj r/pos 6»a/\Xa.
I/e will not come within ten years, o^x M^' ^"''^^ "*■'''•
2. The definite article is us.-d with this genitiv(> after
uunieral and other adverhs denoting reenrrevee : as,
Three times a day, rpU ry]^ vy/xe'pa?.
Many times a month, TroXXuKts toO /xt^vos.
K So too : Ten talents a year, hUa rdXavTa tov erev?.
3. Time when-yvhen the time is detinite-is expressed by
the dative : as,
On that day, iKeivxj t7j W^-pq-
On the same niyht, ttj avr^i wktL
In the fourth year, rwreraprw eVet.
4. Instead of the dative of definite time, the preposition eV
is used :
(1) With all nouns except day, night, j>wnth, year, an<l th.^
names of festivals : as,
Meanivhile, kv roi^ro) (tw xp^^v^'-
In the same summer, Iv tw ahru) Oefm.
(2) With all nouns-except the name of festivals-used
without an attribute : as,
lu the HUjht, Iv vvktL
But, At the Olympic games, 'OXv/xttiois.
64
KLEMENTAIiY GUKEK PROSE COMPOSITION.
fj. Dnratlon of time is (>x})n!sse(l hy tlu; accusative : as,
They ivorhcd for many dcuj^,
TToAAfis ry/xe'pa? dpydil^ovTo.
G. An onlinal -witli oi- witliout a deinonstrative—is used
to denote a pericjd extending uj) to the present : as,
They have been marchiiuj ten dayt<,
ijSy TTopevuvTat ScKarrju yjixipav {nxvTqv).
We came out three years ayo,
i^y/X.O()fieu cTos tovto rpirov.
J/oHon to and motion from are expressed hy prepositions :
as.
He zvent to Athens, yXOev e's ras 'A^ryms.
They fed from Corinth, i<fjvyov d~l, t?i^ KopivOov.
8. Place where is usually expressed by eV : as, At Sparta,
eV Aa/ce8at>o,'t. But, At Marathon, MapaOm'i. At Salami^-,
:ia\aiuvL. At Plataea, YlXaTaiah. At Athens, 'AOr'p',i<TL. At
Thebes, @yf:iy,n. At Olympla, '0\vp.7rla<n. (Locatives'.)
Exercise 22.
1. Next day they l)egan to march across the plain. 2.
They entered the village by night. 3. At that time our fleet
was in the gulf. 4. We defeated the Persians at IMarathon
in the second year of the seventy-second Olympiad. 5. He
dis.uant led our Avails twenty years ago. G. The same sunnner
they invaded Attica. 7. Tiiey were compelled to send a gar-
rison to Eretria. 8. For three days the fleet sailed along die
coast. 9. He paid the interest into the l^ank e\ery month.
10. On the third day he went to 8par-ta. 1 1. JVIany prodigies
were seen in the sky at this time. 1 1>. Flowers bloom there
even in whiter. 1;}. The place had already been besieged ten
months. 14. ][ellrd f,„m Athens lo Thebes. 15. Ho lived
at Thebes till his death.
COMPARATIVK AND SUl'KRLATIVE.
65
I
^23. -(J()M:PA1IAT1VK and SUPEllLATrVK.
o •
1. Comparatives— and words that in.ply comparison-are
t'olU)\ved in dret^k by the genitive : as,
Nothing is more shamfJess than i;/.h> ranee,
ov8lv duai?>ia-T€p6v i(TTL rf;5 d/xa6l(,'as.
A calami ti/ too great for words, TraOo^ fia'On' Xuynv.
They v)ere twice as nnmero^is as loe,
8i7r/\.ao-iot rjiiwv r/(r(U'.
So too: He sings better than yon, kuXXiov riSci crou.
2 The conjunction r), than, may he used instea.l of the
ovnitive and 'must l>e used instead of it, if the n<»un that
LlloNVS the comparative is already in the genitive or dative:
He sells it at less than ten drachmas,
TTwXe: a{,^ o\arro./o5 '/, ScKa Si>axi^r.v {gen. of price).
He does more for ns.thanfor yon,
irXcto) rjiJUi^ TTpaTTii i) vfuv.
NorE.-''H, than, takes the same case aft,er it as before it.
3 U\ior,more, and oWro. or (..lav, less, wh.m used with
uuuierals are usually indeclinable and do not affect the case of
the numeral : as,
In less than ten years, Iv ixelov SeVa Ir^dtv.
They killed more than thrre hnudred,
dTT^'Kram. ttXco. 8uxKorr^o«s {= amplius ducentos in-
terfecerunt).
4. The English too, rather, someivhat, very, with an a.ljectix c,
are expressed^'in Greek by the comparative : as,
2'he ansa-er was rather J rte,
yi aTTOK/Jto-is IKivOtpuniiHi. >)v.
66 KLEMKNTARY (illEKK PliOSE COMPOSITION.
5. 'J'Ik! (;()inp;ti';itiv(; is often usud us in I'iUiflisli instead of
Ui
le positive
;is
■">
Tliey tnake the ivorse a}ypaar the, hcffcr vason,
Toi/ ryrro) Ao'yoi' KjiUTTu) 7roL(>v(ru'.
The young, llie wise, oi vcojtcjooi, ot (rocbdyrepoL.
It is not (jOixl policy to do it,
oh yap ap.ui'Ov tovto TTotelv (lit. a better thi)i,y).
G. 7'()o (jr eat for is /xei^wv ■?} Kara witli tin accusative; too
(jri'(U to, iia^(i)y y) uhjtc >vith an infinitive : as,
A cnkmiity (oo great for tears,
7ra9os /xet^oi/ yj Kara S'JLKpva.
A corpse of svjJerhuman size,
V€Kp()<; fxiit,(j)v rj Kar dvOpajTrov.
TJity (ire too young 1o know,
veoiTcpoL eunv yj wcrre eiSeVai.
7. The superlative is used to express tlie English very,
exireitii'ly, etc., with an adjective : as,
lie was very fond of learning, </)tAo,aa^€frraTos yjv.
S. The following words are added as intensives to the su-
perlative : TToXXw, fidKpM, ^y'], f<(r ; on, Jjs, o/ruj? (with or without
8t'ia/xut) ; et Tts KaX aAAos, above every one : as,
Far the greatest, iroXku) fxiyio-Toq or piiynTToq S>/.
.1 6" quickly as possible, ws Ta;(t(rTa.
/ ivill send as many ships as possible,
7r£fxif/u) on TrAettrras vuvq {Svva/jiaL).
He has benpjited us more than any man has,
•fl-AeiCTTU, et Tl<i Kttl aAAjs, wjAXt^kcv 7//XUS.
1). Other idioms of the comparative and superlative .-(.re:
((/} With more speed than wisdom., ra;^oVe/iu y) croi^oiT^pa.
TIIK Tr.NKKS.
67
(/>) Tlici/ became more powerful than, cver^
?tvvaTMTcpoi avTol awTO)^ eycVoi'TO.
7'hey speak worse than nt<n.af, x«t/'f)'' caurwr Xiyuva-LV.
(r) Jfe w((s more power/nl than anij of his predecessors,
?)VfaTd)TaTo<i ?}i' TMV 7rpoyiy€vr}ixevon'.
{(J) Consider nothing superior to justice, '
jj.rj^ev Trept ttXcovo? ttolov irpo toD ^LKauv.
(e) It was cruel to destroy a whole city rather than the yuiUy,
wfiw TjV oX-qv m'Aiv itLMpBelpat jxaXXov r^ ov Tois ahtuv^.
Exercise •2;^>.
1. Silence is l)etter tiiaii speecli. 2. They were more
numerous than ))nive. 3. lie ,L(avo more trouble to the
enemy than any <.ther ^'eneral. 4. The task is too great for
human strength. 5. 'J'he cavalry alone killed more than six
hundred. 6. They raised as large a fleet as possible. 7. We
killed many times our own number. 8. Nothing is more
cruel than envy. 9. It is not bad policy to hear a thing over
and over again. 10. Necessity is stronger than Nature. 11.
He is too loyal to desert us. 12. He has more wealth than
honesty {use adjs.). 13. If any one was wise, it was he. U.
lie ran faster than T. 1"). I have fought with better men
than you. 16. We are chosen to help the weak.
K 24 —THE TENSES.
O
1. Tlie present tense represents an action as going on now :
as, I tvrite or am a-ritiny, ypacjiU).
2. The present is used idiomatically
( 1 ) To express an attempt . as.
They are trying to persuade you to desert A thens,
TreiOovinv vfid^ Trpo^on'ai Toi's^ 'A6^r^i'tttoi;^.
This is called the; present of the idteinpt.
fiS ELKMENTAIiV UHKKK PROSK COMPOSITIOV,
{'2) III ii;i,rr<iti()ii, iA' /xint f,liit.c, : ;is,
y/ir sutiie sintnner f/ii'>/ seiU uiil oif lunuircd sJtips,
TOO (Lvrov $€f)ov<; CKTre'/ATroucni'' iKuror vav^.
T\\\s is callml tho historic jrresent.
(3) With .-ulverbs of past time, for tho P^iiglisli perfect : as,
I have hci'n doinij thisjhr a Ion;/ flint',
TovTo TTuAut TTOM ( = jainduduui hoc facio).
3. "Wko), T have, come, and alyo\x.at, T ha^^c gone, liave a pre-
sent form .i>id I'crfect meaning ; et/xi, / fiJtaP (jo, a])i'(^sciit form
and future; meaning.
1. The imperfect represents an action as going on in past
time : as, / was writing, £ypa0or.
T). riie imperfect is used idiomatically
(1) T(j express an incomplete, continuous, or hahitujil ac-
tion : as,
TJicij began to retreat immedlatelg, (hc;^<'')/j(H;i' eu^J?.
He n^ed to give them ten di'aehmas a month,
lhi.h(w (iuTi)l<; 06Ka o/jav^a? tov jxtjv6<;.
Th^g continued to lag waste the land for niang •lag>i,
krefJLvov ryjv yrjp en 7ro/\A.us "tj/Jief >a'i.
(2) To express an rt^^«wi^>^ .• as,
lie tidied to back ont of his tvy-ds,
c^are^^o'jpet ra eifirjfieva.
(3) With adverbs of past time, for the English pluperfect :
as,
/ had been doing it for a long time,
Tuvro TrdXat Ittoiovv.
G. The future represents an action going on in future; time :
TjS, / sh,all lurite or be tvrlting, yixi.ipt,).
TlIK TENSES.
69
It is ofton used as a polito command : as,
This, than, yon will do, ravra ovu Troa/o-erc.
7. The aorist represents an action as occurring' at some ni-
delinite (dopicTTos) past time : as, / >rn>fr, iypay^a.
As opposed to the imperfect, which is tl.e UMise of descrip-
tion, the aorist is the tense of narration : as,
lie weld up and /»'(/(tn to teach,
avi^r] KOI i^ihaaKCi'.
S. The aorist is used for the Knghsh phiperfeci,
( 1 ) When simply marking precedence in time : as,
Thei/ hail wished to revolt even before the war,
ifiovXy'iB-qa-au dTroorf/v.xt kul tt^o toD TroXefuw.
(2) After erret, eVeiS,/, o)s, ore (when) ; co,? and TrpiV (lUl): -'ih,
When theu had raised a troph/ the>/ sailed away,
eVci eo-T-qo-av rpoTratov aTreTrXcvcrav.
<K The aorist is used for the Englisli present
(1) ()f.what is just happening : as,
[ am amused at your threats,
yfrO-qv xfus (rats aTreiXctS.
(2) Of what usually happens : as,
Ma7iy thinys happen unexpectedly,
TToXXa TTupa 8o4'av iyiviTO.
This is called the yuomic aorist.
10 The perfect represents an action :is completed now ; the
pluperfect, an action as cou.plcted in some past Ume : as,
have written, y/y^ac/^a. / had written, iyeypacf^eiv.
11. The future- perfect is used
70 ELEMKNTAUY <iKEEK I'UOSK COMPOSITION.
(1) To represent a futures {iction continuing in its efTocts :
as,
lie shdil he appointed In commavd iin,
{•!) To represent a future action cornpUited iinraediatelj : as,
S/ •/'(!,{■ ((ltd it shall be done imniediatelt/,
(pfxii^ Kiii. 7r€7r/jai:'cTui,
(.)) As the ordinary future of verbs witli a perfect-passive^
form l)ut present meaning- : as, //c/xi/y/^ai, / rtunfinher ; fut.
fi€fxv)'i(rofiaL KUrr}fji(u, I potises{> ; fut. KiKTyjaofiai.
\'l. The fut.-pf. act. is expressed by a periphrasis of tlie pf.
part. <»f tlie verb with the fut. of e//xt': as,
Tf icr. do this, we shall have done our diity^
lav TovTo TTOiwfiei', tu Seoi^ra ircTrotriKuTe's iaofieOa.
lo. The seven Greek tenses are divided into i)riniary and
secondary. Thus :
Prinwuy
f Pres
I Fut.
I Peif.
I Put.-
pcrf.
Secondary
Inipf.
Aor.
, Plupf.
EXEHOLSE 24.
1. I came, I saw, I concjuercd. 2. He is now trying to save
them. .'5. The country was inlia})ite(l in tlie time of Ctcrops.
4. They went out and b(>gan to shout, a. They returned to
Athens Mhence they had come. G. They did not d;ire to do
it till they liad killed the king. 7. We began to blockade
the city on the seventh day. 8. 'JMiey will never possess
(Mupire. <l N'nu have come without arms. 10. Your minds
will be adorned with all the virtues. 11. They had already
THE Moona. '*'^
boon waiting for a long time. 12. A smaller numbor ofton
(lofeats a lai-,L,'or. VX Tho.y liave made an inn)a(l into our
territory. 14. We sliall then liavft boon left withcmt friends.
1'). Ho always imposed iU) severest penalties.
Th.^
J.', 25.— THK ^lOODS.
o
1. The subjunctive is used in simple sentences
(1) In exhortations, in the 1st pers. sing, ai, I plur.
nogativ(^ is fxt'i : as,
Ld us not for; /ri our former friend n,
fxij iTnXaOuiixSa tmv irfuv r/jiAwr.
This is called the JiorffUive siibjnnctive.
(•J) In questions that imi^ly deliberation : as,
What are we to do ? ri irocC>ixcv ; ( = <iuid facla.nus ?^
This is called the deliheratlve svhjanctive.
^OTV..—What oight we to have done? is tl xp^> ttouI' :
( = quid facerennis 1)
The deliberativ. sul)junctive is also used after (3ovXei or
OiXtL<; ; as,
Do you wish that we shonld remain ? ^cXet^ /xcVw/xcv ;
(:)) AVith M in prohibitions, for the imperative: as,
Fear not, /at; SeuTrjre.
:t^OTE.— If 1 ' • present is used in prohibitions, the imperat i n e
is used ; if the aorist, the sul).iu!U'Uve : as,
Do not steal, p/ KXiirre or [uj kXcVt/s.
2. The optative (cUrtKyi ^'yKAtcr..) gets i > nauu. from its us.
in expressing a wish : as,
Mai/ I uKcer he seen in- your house I
fjL-qiroTe 6(1)0 ei'yjv Trap' vfilu
72
KLRMKNTAKV OHKHK Ph'OsK COMPOSITION.
Tts chiof uso, Ijowcvcr-, is .-is ;i NcvoMdury iikkmI (., (1,,. indioi-
tivc ;ui(l Nul)juiicliv(? : ;is,
1 hm-e i'Anm to m; t/iejifjhf,
rjKU} Tin Tiji> fi(i)(fii' 'i%.).
I had coiiiii to sf'ji thejtijht,
yjKov "va Tiji' /Ki-xyjv 1^01/11.
Unwr t]i(. in.port.-mfc rul(. : The hid. or .sHhj./olhurs pnm„r,j
f'msKs ; the oj>t(U., seeondnrt/ (^•2i, I?,).
:i TIm5 optntive with aV is us.m1 .is .1 wcikcr futun, or to
iiiukf ail assertion less positive : as,
//<; iri/l h'. ,,l,ul to iln It, ^jhiu,^ Au rnZra 7r/.arroi.
/ shovhl my that ijoa air, rh/ht,
eLTTcifu av eycoye on opOw^ ^X^'?-
1. Tlio (listinrtiou (,f tinio is lost in M,,. .IrpnuL-nt moo.ls of
tli(^ aorist : as, Know t/ii/sf//] yvCtOi acawoV.
Hence, in the dependent moods, while tlie present i.iai-ks
strictly the awtlnuance of an action, the a-rist marks simply
lis orr//yyr/^(VMuid is much more usual than the j.reseni : as,
/ toUi to write, fSo,'Aofxca yp^nu. Jlut, I n-lsh to be writiny
(e.g., lohevi he comes), y8oi'Ao/xut yfuupuv.
«o too : Do not steal, /xr/ K-AeVre (of a hahit). /.;/ ^Ae^r/s (of a
particular a(!t)
5. The idea of time, however, is (expressed ])y tht^ (lep(!nd(;nt
moods of the aorist
(1) Tn oratio obli(|ua : as,
//.' s<ud that he had do,,, it, '^,j ^au^^r^u, or Jttc. or. ^ouj^r.t.v
(or. recta = eVotVyirn, / <lid, it).
(2) When the i)articipl(! stands for a main verb (§41,2): as,
IJe tuok tJi.c. moaetj and disparted,
I'ASSIVK AN'I> Mn>l>I.K VolCK.
73
('.. TIk^ fill. «>l»l. find tlic |.t'. <.i)t. iuv never foiiiid except in
if.itio (il)li(iiia at'tei- secoiulaiy toiisciH (§ 'JT), 2) : as,
lln sdld that tJui oith'H would revolt,
tlmv on fit 7r()/\ct9 UTTorrTT/rroMTO
UTTfX
(or. recta = drrofTTTyfrovTa
(, fhcjf will rr,iH)lt).
Note. — As opp<»s«
alle(lyt/ii<«.
•d to th(3 iiifuutiv(;, tlu; otlier nuxids :w
KxKiioi.su 25.
C (Tse the moods of the. aor. rather fhau th(m- of the pres.)
1. Shall we s|)(!ak or koep silent ] 2. Lot iiio rest my weary
lindy. ;;. Strike but hear. I. lie ye an<,'ry and sin not. 5.
\Vh(M-e shall I stand'^ G. Let us ad.)ni ourselves with sim-
plicity. 7. Ho said that ht^ would go away hy iii.uht. S.
May you \n^ more fortunate than 1! U. Do not do your
rountry this wron,^. 10. Where am I to turn I 11. Do you
wish that we sliould <i;o away i 12. I should like to hear you
siui,'. l;}. J)onot tell me that anythiii.i,' is more wonderful
lliaii man. II. '('hereupon \u^ or.lered them to give quart(;r.
IT), it was said that they had t-h row ii'- poison into the cisterns.
S 20.— PASSIVE AND MIDDLE VOICE.
1. 'Phe following vei'hs have a passive meaning and are
followed by vTTo with the genitive of the agent: IkitUtm, am
h,nnshed; ATro6vt]iTKio, am killed (pass, of dTroKT€ii'u>) ; 0£.'yw,
,i,n pat to il'ujht {y^v 2^ro><e<mted) ; AXurKo^iai, am taken {ir.i^s. of
,u,>an); Kelfuu, am placed (pass, of ri^xt. Cf. crvyKet/Aai, am
rompoHed and ?)ui.Keifj.iu, am disjwse.d).
2. The following verbs hav(^ two perf.'cts in tlu^ active
voi<-e, one a perfect active in meaning, the other a present
passive :
74
i;li MENT Mv'V (;i;i;i';iv rRnsF, composition.
iit'oi.yi (yy(, Ojxni
Trrjyrvfi.i, fie
KdTu.yvvjiL, hi'cdk
] st i)f.
iyijyef}K(i.
uX(t)\.era.
'Jiul i.f.
ai/eajya, ulniid open.
^yi'i/yop": "'II' ii'fdki'.^
■watch (lii'cr, irepi).
(")\<i)\a, 'pi'vlsJi.
7r€Trt)ya, <iui fixed, frozen.
Kiireaya, am hroheu.
3. 'Pho middle voice represents
(1) An fiction performed hy ilu^ sul)ject ujx.ii liimsclf : as,
/ t<iu'h vij/self (jetnnefrij, Hioda-KOfKu ryv yew/ierpiav.
This is called the refiexive use of the middle.
(2) An action performed by the subject for liimself : as,
Jle chooses u'(ti\ alfii'i.TOL tw TToXejxov
( stakes for liimself).
(."{) An action which the subject ,«,'ets performed for him-
self, as :
/ hai'e my children tmiyht (jeouetry,
()t.C>a<rKOfi<a TO? 15 TrurSa? 7r,v yeo.yx€T|fimr.
1. The true retlexive use of the middle is i-are unless Mherc^
the verb ^cts a new meaning in the middle voice. Thus,
Ife praised liimself is eVj/Vecrei' envruV.
He killed himself aTri(T(pa^ev kavrov.
It is found in the followinsr : —
Tret'^oj, persuade, M. ohe,/ ; Ao.'o), inish, M. haihe ; areXXu,,
send, M. yo ; ttui-oj, mahe to cease^ V(, cease ; rropevu), make to
(JO, M. (JO : Trepu/oo). make to cross, iVI. cross ; TikXin, plack, Isl.
tear the hair, monr.i ; ^mrithyn, place on, AF. altack; ,'nrex'o,
keep of j\L, ahstaii, ; t//ko), „i<lf, Al. pi„e; ^afVoj, shoio, M.
appear; Kot/xaw, lull, M. sleep; (jtoi'S^w, frijhteu, M. fear ;
PASSIVE AND MIDDLE VOICE.
75
as,
to-T77/xi, p^acf, M. ^tavd ; iiruyw, make to hasten, M hasten ;
,'nra\XarTio, make to rnuove, M. reinove, depart; in'r^vvixi, fix, IM.
congeal ; XauOavw, escape notice, M. forget ; ayaAAw, a<lorn, M.
pUime oneself; /3ovXcvo}, advise, M. take counsel.
EXKHCISE 2G.
1. They have all been ])aiiishe(l from the country. 2. Finn
ice had Tormed upon the river. :i. lie friglitened others,
even though afraid himself. 4. The stag bathed in the lake.
5. Do you wish us to abstain from all pleasuivs ? G. He said
that all revelry would cease. 7. Do not i)ine away with
sorrow for the child, y. Do y')U think they are watching
over our safety ? 9. The gates of the temple stood open night
and day. 10. My h-ad is broken. 11. Shall we never per-
suade you to obey US'? 12. Standing tlu>re, they erected a
trophy. 13. He wished to take counsel with us. 14. Do not.
plume yourself upon your name. 15. He was put to death by
his countrymen. IG. May all men so disposed speedily
perish !
§27.— THE MIDDLE {Continued).
1. The middle is often used to express that the subject per-
forms an iicfionfor himsc^lf : as, alpio>, take, M. take for one-
sdf, choose ; a?/;..,, raise, ^l. take on oneself undertake : /xto-^oo.,
hire out, let out, M. hire for oneself ; (r7r€v8o,, pour a libation,
M. make a truce.
8o too : e^ivai vo>ov9, enact laws (for others) ; OeaOai v6pnv<;,
enact laws (that one nuist obey oueself).
2. The middle is occasicmaily used also to express that the
subject gets jui action pert'orme<l foi- himself : as,
TTouHyxru, harr. mad.: 8.^a'rrKo/.a,,, harr taught: -y/,a</>o/x«.,
'prosecute ( - have a name entered befoix^ the; archon).
7G
ELICMEXTARY GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION.
I
.3. The following middle verbs use the aor. i)ass. instead of
the ax-, mid.: (i)')/3dofxat, fear, icfiofSrjOrjv, I feaiwd ; KOipio/xru,
sko.p^ iKoiiiijBiqv, I sh'pt ; K\ivnp.aL, lie, eKXiOrjv, I Imj ; d(rKeo/>tat,
practise, yjiTKijOtp', I jn^actised ; Seo/^ai, ask, i^er'jOrjv, I asked;
Trepaioofiai, cross, iTnpaK^Oiqv, I crossed; fxe/xcpofxat, blame,
ifi€fi(jiOrjv, 1 hhitiwd ; dTrakXaTTofxaL, depart, a.Tr'q\\ayr]v, I de-
parted oi- (jot rid of.
4. The following futures are middle in form but passive in
meaning: Tt//.ryo-o/xut, / sh<dl he honoured; wr/jtAr/o-o/xac, 1 sliall
he aided ; ^pet/^o/xai, / shall he reared; (fivXa^ofxaL, I shall he
guarded ; o/xoXoyriao/jMi, I shall he confessed.
5. The following verbs are true deponents : Se'xo/xai, receive ;
ylyuofKu, hf'come; /xa'xouai, fght; fMaiuofxat, am mad; rfBoimt,
rejoice; aurOdi'ofiai, jjcrceive ; do-7ra^o/xat, ivelcome ; (iovkofiai,
wish (1 a. eftov\rj6y]v).
Exercise 27.
1. Their names will always Ik; honoured by this country.
2. He practised all the virtues. 3. They have had a bron/e
statue of him made. 4. On the third day they crossed the
river. 5. Besides this, the gods ha\ e ordained unwritten laws
for man. 6. They made a truce with us for (cVt'+a/r.) fifty
years. 7. Will they undertake to make war against us? 8.
Solon enacted laws for the Athenians. 9. Which of the two
are we to blame for (gen.) this disaster? 10. Do you want us
to prosecute him for theft ? 11. You will be aided mor(! by
few than by many. 12. We begged them to depart fr(.m the
country. 1.3. They are to(j wise to choose war instead of
peace. 14. Remember that the half is often more than the
whole, lo. I do not think tiiat we shall sell our freedom
chfmply.
TIIK PARTICLE AN.
77
§ 28.— THE PAllTTCLE "AN.
1. The particle av may he used ^vith tho iiulicativo, sub-
junctive, optative, inlinitive, or participle.
2. "Ai' is used with the impf. or aor. ind. to denote a result
depending upon some condition expressed or implied : as,
You would he making a mistake, y'uxdprave'i av.
Thit uumld never have happened,
TocTo ovTTor iyeveTO av
( -\- impf. ind. = would now (or then).
'^*' I _|_ aor. ind. —woidd have.
.3. "A I' joined to pronouns and introductory particles has the
foi-c(M)f 'rrer and takes the subjunctive: as, os av, whoever;
IWav (-or€+ar), ivhenever ; lav ( = ci+av), if '^rer : as,
lie pvfs to death whomsoever he catches,
t)v av iXrj 8tac^^€i/36t.
Wheyiever /i<? comes, I will go away,
orav iK€iv()<i tkOy, e'yw (XTrei/xi.
If ever he does this, he is punished,
lav Tovro TrpaTTrj, KoX.dt,€Tai.
NoTR.— After a secondary tense, the subjunctive usually
becomes optative and the dv is dropped : as,
Whenever he came, J went away,
uTe tKCti/os tXOoi, lyo) aTTijew.
J fever he did this, he was punished,
el TovTo irpuLTToL ckoAu^cto.
This is calle<l the optative of indefinite frequency.
So too : / Will irait till it is opened, fuvS) cws ai' dvoixOf.
waited till it was opmed, ^uvov cojs uroix^*'^
78
ELEMENTATIV OREEK PROSE COMPORlTION.
I. "A I' with llic «»l>t. i>^ "scd ;is -i weaker or a (M.nditional
futiuv (.^ -i;"*, :;) : as,
/ should lih- to sm it, tovto t/8c'(.js av tAot/xi.
Thr. /((/r.s viill not makH us good,
01 x'oiwi ovK av ■Yjfxd'i ayaOov<i irofqaeiav.
Hence, too, the opt. with ai/is used as a polite imperative: as,
Go in, pledse, p((upots av eurw.
5. "Av is used with the infinitive or i)articip]e where, in a
finite construction, it would 1)0 used with a finite uiood : as,
77/.// f/ioiujht fh'it th>-H should take the city, ho^urav av kX^iv
T7/r 7r(;Atr ( Finite c( )nstruction = eXoi/xei/ av, we shall take). They
kurin thni fhrij shoidd conquer, cyv^aav av KftaTrjaavTc^ (Finite
construction = Kfnny'iiTaiii^v av, ire shall conquer). See § 44, 2.
G. "A,/ is usually placed nt^ar the beginning of the sentence,
and may, if the sentence is long, Ije repeated with the verb to
which it belongs : as,
For evidently, if' I did this, f should be teaching you not to
believe in the existence of the ,jods, frttc/,ws ya/j ^v iy^ T6Se ^otcLv
^eou? av SiSd(XKUtiJ.L fir] I'o/xttcii^ V"? eti^ai-
Exercise 28.
1. I should like to understand this language. 2. You will
never find a better man. 3. I should not l)e so happy now.
4. No judge would have condemned liim to death, o. If ever
they stole, they were banished. 6. It would not have liai)pen-
(>(1 without a cause. 7. AVluMicver we are angry, we are mad.
8. Call no one happy until his life is eided. 9. Some would
have guessed one thing, others another. 10. AVhenever tlu^y
advanced, we retreated. 11. There is no one whom I should
be more eager to lu^ar. 12. Pie said that he would have pre-
ferred death itself, l:'.. We thought that the town would
have been tak(.i. lb Who would have been found base
enough to betray him 'i
P NAL AM) OIUKCT CLAUSKS.
79
§L><). -FIXAL AND OIUKCT CLAl'SKS
AM) VKRMS OF FKAUINC.
1. Clauses introduced ])y m», m, or o-o)?, /// on/n- that, ex-
pressJTig ail end or purpose (and therefore called Jiixd dauKt^s)
take the subjunctive after primary tenses and the optative
after secondary. The ne<>;M,tive is /xr/ : as,
/ have cume to see the battle, r/Koj Iva tjjv fiaxV^ '''^^^•
/ had come to see tin, hattle, rjKOv tVa rr/)' jJ^nxW '■^o^'f^'-
2. The subjunctive, however, is used instead of the opt. in
final clauses when, for the sake of vividness, the past is to be
r(^presented as present : as,
He n-ent abroad that he might not be compelled to ahrogate
ani/ of his lairs, d7rc8/)/xr/o-€v tva /xr; rtva rCov rofxwv AvayKaaOf^
X.7j(TaL.
This is called f/raphlc sefptence.
3. The ind. of the secondary tenses is used after final con-
junctions to express an end unattained : as.
They should have held an investigation in order ihof 're.
might have got rid of him, xi>W Cn^^lv avTol^ iVa liiriiXXdy/ieOa
TDVTOV.
This idiom will translate the English in ichich case %re
might, etc.
4. Ve!-l)s meaning to iahe nrre, strlre, <'tjerf, ;u'<^ followed by
o7r(,)s and the future indicative. The negative is /x7/ :
Till' 1(1 ir t((kes care that this shall not occur,
6 ro/xos err:'if>-a.Tat ottcw tovto fiij yei'riaerai.
The clause iniro'ljced by o-o;s is called an objert clause.
The opt. takes the place of t'.e ind. after secondary tenses;
bill in .< .aplnc seinience {^-2, 4) the ind. remains unchanged:
as,
80
ELEMENTARY GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION.
Thi'!/ icere iakiuf/ stfjM to hrht;/ orrr tko. citjf, iirparTov O7ro« Ti/r
TToAu- TrixxnroLy'jaduy (oi' in <,n'a|)liic s('(|U('iu'(> — TTpoinroujiToviriv).
5. Whci used in cominaiids or oxliortaiions, the ^e^l)
meanin,«^- to fnke care, nxny bo (li'opp(!d b(^fore ottw? : a«,
See thai yi>, he, men, ottms artaOe dv^peq.
G. Ver])s of jWirivf/ usiifUly talc ^ the subjunctive after
l)riiiiai'y ttuises and the o])',, after secondary. y7uU or A.s/!
after verljs of feariny is /,tr; and tJittt iiot is /x-r/ ov : as,
1 fear thai he vrUl die,
(l)of3ov;iuL [XI] Odvrj ( = v ;ieor lu? moi'iatur).
1 fear thai he will not die,
(j)()f3ov/i.at /xy ov bavy ( ■= vereor ut moi'iatur).
/ vas afraid that he tvoidd die,
l<^o{3ij6yv fiyj Odvoi. (or — in graphic sequence — Oavyj).
7. The ])ast ind., ho\ve\er, is used after vei'bs of Jvaring
wh(^n they refer to a fact; and the fut. ind. with /y.>' or otto),-
[xy, when the fear is regarded as likely to be realized : as,
/ am afraid he iixiti speaking in jest,
(^oftor/xuL jxy ttul^wv e'Aeyer.
J am afraid ive shall find that this is true,
0-)/?oi'/xai fiy (or oTTws fiy) ehfiynoixeu toT'to akyjOk elvai.
8. There is danger that, ku/Sui-o's eo-rt jxy, I am on ikij guard
lest, (j}vXdTTOfx(n ixy and / suspect that, vTroirTevo) /xi'j take the
construction of veibs oif'aring: as,
7'here is danger that thoy a- ill side tvith the enemy,
KLi'hvr()<; i<TTt. /ly yeVdjrrai fxera twi/ TroAe/xt'cur.
Exercise 29.
1. See that ye Ik- worthy of your liberty. 2. T am afraid
that men lose themselves more than their neighl)(mrs. :\. JIc
thought he needed fi'iends, that ho miglit have fellowdabourers.
THE CONDITIONAL SKNTENCE.
81
^e^l)
I. The .Ljods <,'fiv(i tliciu slcr]., .lliiit- tlicy m'vj;hl rest from tlicii-
(iiiily labours, f). |)<. in.t, ho iUViiid Ihiit you wili iint, Im more
fortunate than T. G. 1'hcy lo..k rain; that tlii^ Letter men
should rule tli(^ wors(;. 7. TIhto w.as no danger that the
place would bo taken. S. T was afraid that my head was
broken. 9. Tn order to diicelvo the enemy, they ])ej-iui to
retreat. 10. lie will taki; car(^ that we do not escape his
notice. 11. They will btvMk don n the bridge, in order that
we may not cross tin; rivei". 12. lie managed that tlu; army
should not be tortured wilb hunger and thirst. i:'). He
ought to have ca'l(Ml in witnesses, in which case we might
have referred to them. 1 4. They took care that we should
not only pi'omise but perform.
S30.--THE CONDITTOXAL SENTENCE.
1. The //-clause of the conditional sentence is called the
protasis {7r,>oTelvo)) ; the main clause, the ui>n.lusU (avrodt^o./xi,
refer). Th<^ negative of the protasis is /x»/, of tlie apodosis ot'.
2. Three classes of conditional sentences are to be dis-
tinguished :
{1; Those in which nothing is implied with regard to the
fullilment of the condiHon. These take the ind. in ])oth
clauses : as,
If liii has anf/thi'iig, he (jicex it, d n e'xe'-, ^trt-oatr.
//■ he had aiujfhhaj, h<- (jan' if, d tl elx^x' (or tTx^i),
erttrtoiJ (oi' t^titKCi^).
(i>) Those in winch \hr fullilment of the condition is referred
to tlu^ future. Of these tiiere ai'(; two ty['es :
{<i) AVhere the eondition is regarded as hkely to be ful-
filled : as,
I/he has (old Vav^. shall hare) aa>/fhln;/, he will (jim it,
82
KLKMKNTAIiV fJRKEK PUOSK fOMPOSITION.
Il('i(! cdi' with I Ik; suhjuii. is used in llic ])i-()lasis, the fnt.
ind. ill tlio ;i|)()(|(),sis.
(h) WIku-o tho condition is regarded as indik(>ly to lie ful-
filled : as,
J/ he ,<h(>/i/(/ {in-ri' to) hnrc, ninjUiiiKj, Ju> would y ice it,
w w ^ ' V
Here e*' with tho opt. is used in the protasis, the; oi)t. with
ui' in the apodosis.
(.')) Those in which the condition is contrary to fact. Of
these also there are two types :
{(i) Where tlu^ condition is referred t(» the pre.sent : as,
//'//" liad ait.jjfh'ivij [now), lie icon Id i/ln: it,
a TL €//^ei', eoLOov ar.
Here the imperfect ind. is used in the protasis, the impf.
with (If in tiie apodosis.
(h) Where the condition is referred to the past: as,
If he had had (uiything, he vnould have given it,
Here the aor. ind. is used in the protasis, the aor. with av
in the apodosis.
NoTK 1. -Conditional sentences of the first type under dass
(•■\) may, however, express action continued in past time: as,
If J>e had had ajleet, he toould have commanded the islands,
ti vavuKor e(;^e, rCov v7j(tu)v iKparei dv.
Note 2. —In conditional sentences of class (3), the juotasis
niay refer to the present and the apodosis to the past, or rice
versa : as,
// they wert' wisf'. (>iow), they v'onJd not hare done it,
ei tropin ya-ai', ovk av Tuura C7rot'//trur.
iiid
TllK CONDrnoNAl- SKNTKNCK.
83
UI'
3 T1m> cmditional scnlcncs ..f tli.> \'nnu : I/rnr hr has
Ihiu!/, he (jave it, d n 4'x'". «'^''^'"'' ^''^^ '""'"'" ^ -'"'' •''''■^- ^•
NoTK. -Thr v<M-l) of tho a])()(l<.si.s ill tho latter type is usually
—because of its f.vciueiitativci force in tlu^ iii.pf.
TAHLK OF (CONDITIONAL SKNTENCKS.
(1) Simple puks. and pasp conditions. (Nothing said as
to fulfilment of condition)-] ml. in both clauses.
(2) FUTUHE CONDITIONS. (n) Moi'p. vl nd j'nt (condition re-
o-arded as likely to he fullilh'd. English sign, sholJ or >rlll i.i
Tipod.)— 'l-:ar + subjun. inpioiasis and fut. ind. in apod. (A)
Lrss rlrld fnf. (condition regarded as unlikely to le fultilled.
Eng. ^v^n, shnH/<l uvwerr. to in protasis)— E? + opt. in protasis
and opt. -}-ai' in 'M'^'f^-
(3) Conditions contkauy to fact, (a) Referred to pre,.
(EiK' si<ni, '//o/r, expressed or impiied in each clause)- hnpf.
i,.,l'in protasis and inipf. 4- ar in apod. (A) JH'rrrd to past
(Eng. sign, should, or v-oahL harr \n a]>od.)-Aor. md. m pro-
tasis and aor. + dv in apod.
For a full account of the conditional s<Mitence, see Good-
win's "(ireck I^loods an<l Ten.ses/' from Avhich the above re-
marks are mainly taken.
Exercise 30.
1 If he had not spoken through :ui interpreter, we should
not have understoo.l lum. 2. Tf he ^vere to <!.. it, 1 should be
v(.rv-lad. 3. Jf tears nv<mv a r.-medy for sorrow ('fea.), we
slumld buy tears with goUl r.V "J- - ^^ you atten.pt many
thin-s, you will .h> none well. 5. If tJ.e how were aUvavs
bent! it would break. (3. if (even a mnn c<mf.M-s a fa.<.ur i.e
should forget it immediately. 7. If this country nad been
84
ELEMENTARY nnKRK PHOSE COMPOSITION.
m
\vi.S(', il. \\<ilil(| licMT Ii;i\ I- lih'Icrlakrii sii(;li ;i \v;u'. S. If tJic
enemy do this, wt^ sii.ill (l('[»r!\(' tlinn of their ships. 0. Ii he
liJid doiH' il, h(^ would h;i\(? d(■^|lis('d hiiiisch". lO. If (hrjcc
\v<'r(i (ir:ii, \v(» shoiihl cro.vS the ].ik(\ II. if we hud not ,<,m\''ii
(luurter, ull \\(»uld h;i\(i l)cru killed. 12. If \\(i slu)aM sui--
I'f'udei" «»ii such Icrms, we should be mad.
\\v had 111
uasily.
i;;. If h
Ihmmi a ii
iiioi-e, 111
(l('s[)isc t
^S;51._'KI WITIt V^Elins OF EiAFOTION.
Et with the iiuHcativo is used Cor ort, fJnf, tifiav veihs e\
])ressing emotion: as, Wond^'V iBaiitA'C,^,), Up. ,i.-<luiiii<'<l {ah'^vi'u-
jiiu), hi' indl<fU(ud (uyavuKrcio), Jic safisl'ird (dyaTraoj), hr, di'tuulj'ii ,
{hiivw (Ivta). The negative is ij.y. Fj.ij. :
I ((in surprised that yon hesitate,
/ am itidv/vaiif tJuit [ am not id>le to come,
lie is )iot satisjicd, y-ilh escapitHj pnnlM/inintt,
OVK (iyUTU €t p.lj ?)i'.K7]l' f.?)OJK€V.
EXKItCIHE 31.
1. I am surprised tliat they were not aji^'ry Avitli us. 2. It.
was a di-eadful thing that he did not appear. 3. He wa- not
ashamed that he was briniiiny- a false cliaru'e airainst me. 4.
ff you associate with th(> idle, ynu will liecome idle yourself.
T). If we con(juer them in one jnoie l)iittle, we shall be un-
done (2;>/:, §26, 2). G. If tlKise who (,^3, 1) have been dis-
appointed were to die, all would dit;. 7. If I liad obev(Ml the
doctor, I should not now Ite ill. S. Ke would ha\o rem;un(Mi
three days at Athens, if they liad asked him to do it. 1). No
country would be safe unless the citizens ob(yet! tiie laws.
lO. ]f he were here, we should teach him ge()metry. 11. If
«
1. Th
//<' . .
IS. . .Of
■7
iid (dl.
Inste;
iircMroe,
■J. Tl
own el
.(•(lent :
I'.'lat iv(
\
s. If Ml.
0. h he
If tlu! ice
lOilM HUV-
nii: I'T ■
K.
86
!i, had more t'-"' i'^ht and 1'-^ p.'ission, h<^ wftnld succeed i.ion?
,.,.,,ilv. 1 I; i, ('\= 1- rrcc'.N.Ml ii t'liAniii-, ho jiovcu- fof^'ob it.
i;;. If lie I "I not 1 mini a good s< : ant, h<5 would n«'v(>r]iav(!
n.vri a -on. inastor. II. U" t!i. , liad feared tlicii- general
iiinrc, I hey \\'>ui'l Itavo ft'Jifi
IV less. lii. If wc
(1,'spisi; the artist, v.(! shall du. delighted -:''• '^le work.
vei'hs ('\'
(} dr<',ti(lj)il
f,
us. 2. It
e wa- not
■<t nic. 4.
( yoni'sclf.
dl 1)0 II 1 1-
icen dis-
l)('y(Ml tli(>
rem; lined
t. 1>. No
tiie, laws.
f. n. If
m
^:i:,'.— Tii!-: i;klati\ -
I. The connnon ♦ ''rrela,ti\<'.s are :
Ifi'.. . .who, ovTos. . .ik (Lat. i '[Ui) ; a rjrmt. . .as, roaov-
rni...o(w<i or o? (Lai. ia,ntus. .iiiantvis); sHr/> . .(Us, touwto^
rno? or <U (talis. . ..lualis) ; >>s ohl. . .as, - -"' <, ..«. . .r/AtKos'
iuid alL . .U'ho, irdvrc<i. . . ocrot.
Instead of rorroDro?, toioutos and Tr/AtKotTos, res])ecl ivcily,
r'i(r(Mroe, Toi(Kr8e and TijXiKOirSe. are us(;d. (i^ 1 I, li.) ^^-.V- ■"
Yon Sfll/ such thiViJS (IS no OH'' I'Isi', it'onhl soij.
Totai'ra Atyei? a f;i;rte(.ij aAAos ai' Xeteuv.
■2. The case of th(^ relative is determined hy tin; verl. of its
own clauses ; its gendcM', numher, and person by the ante-
cedent : as,
7'hls is the DKOi. H-hoDi yoi- sair,
oiVos I'TTiv (I avrji> ov €(,()es.
The ant( edcnt may ])e put (witluuil tlie article) in the
relative clause; or— if a denionst r;ilive— omilled : a,,,
This is llii', ))itiii' irliorii ijon scur,,
OVTO<i iiTTIV i)v ilOF.' (IrO/XX.
7V/0.SV' /c/h) iri-rr d'llc. </i,(/ if.,
.^,
v^,
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
1.0
I.I
1.25
|50 ""'^~
la
'!!'|2.5
III 2.2
11^
2.0
1.8
U i 1.6
V2
<?
<^
/}.
/y
Photographic
Sciences
Corporation
«
ip
^
M
\
V
\
^9)
V
^V
Ci^
23 WFST MAIN STREET
WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580
(716) 672-4503
^A
'%^
nj^
KfMM
)
t<'/
f/j
80
K.MOIKNTAIJY CfJRKK PI.'OSK f < >M I'OSITIOX.
ii
i. \N Imii ihc rcl.ili\f: <-«unicc(s two nou.is of (lilT'ciTMit i;on
''(•'•, it iisu;i!!y .•I'^rpcs with llm Jjittur : as,
77h- .s/nml ir/nr/i iJieij call aciniifar,
,0 i^l.^mi 01/ (IKWUKYjl' KaA.(iV(TlV.
• K A rcbitive referring to two or iiioi'o fuitecediAnts a<n'oes,
if tli(> aut(M.,.(l('nt.s ai'o tlui names of persons, with tlie more
worthy -(-ndcr (masculine ratlier tlian feminine); but, if the
antecedents an; the names of things, the relative is in the
neuter ])kiral or agrees with the last : as,
Tlie rnru and irornett ivJio are near,
Thry ,fot rid 0/ the mrrs, ,laiuj,'rs, and confmion into which
Vi'nt'f.fiilJvt,, a::r)\kayjjirav TToki^un' Kid Kw^vvuiv Kiu Tapa^^^ ets a
(or yi') KHT€arT7]^€i'.
(). When th(! antecedent is in the genitive or dative, tlu^
relative if in the ;i<vnsat ive- is usually attracted into the
case of the antecedent : as.
We vi'I oJtcif tlie hmder ivhom hi .scuds tis,
Treiao/xcOd tm yy^jxovL J av Trtfiij/rj.
This is called Affic affrnction.
The antecinlent Jiiay he put in the i-elative clause or— if a
demonstrative -omitted : as,
lie came -with the/orcc he had,
rjXOe (Try p e7;^e hvvdjxtL.
I asc. tchat I hare, xf^dofxaL oh £X"> ( = rorrois a).
7%'// irill fhryrt what they siijf'crcd,
e-TiAryfro; rat dji^ 'liraOov (= rovrm' a).
7. Ivrru' Of", somr. ( = there are who), is treated as one word
and th(^ i)roiioun declined : as.
Some say, etrrti' ru Xiynva-LV.
Suvie they ivoauded, lariv oU tTpwaav,
m
TIIK HEf-ATlVE.
S7
rout i^cii
s agroes,
lie more
lit, if the
is ill the
!o lohich
(ivo, tlu^
into the
>r — if ,1
).
e word
So l(M.: Somctiines, amv ore. S<»neinhnrr, earrLv ("ttov. ISovi^.
hoff, Ittw nTrM<;. 3"o hofv, oPk eanv ottok ( -^ it is iiiipossihle
that) : ;is,
Jt can ttof hr lh<if If iriJl do it,
ovK eaO' oTTios rarra 7r(itr)(T€»
8. "OoTts is used
(1) For tohoerer, any one loho (Lat. quis(piis) : as,
Whoeve}' yon, are, ya/r will be punishfd,
lie has suffered no harm n-hatcvfr,
ireTTovOev ovSei/ otiovv (Lat. lu) taiitillum (guidon)).
(2) As an (>inph;i,tic relative : as,
The city vhirh is there, y) ttoXis yns cKeZ ifrrtu.
9. All who is TTdivrcs otroi or ei ns : as,
All those irlio trere taken, irere killed,
TTtti/res orrot (or ci,' Tti/es) €\i]ti)Or)(rav XiriOavov.
10. //c ^^"^o, ^/i« «irni viho, anyone who, with a finite verb,
are expressed — if the antecedent isunemphatic-by the article
with the participle : as,
The mail ivho first corrupted the people, was the man who first
entertained them, o TrpwTos irTuura';, Trpwros ?)(i(l>Oi.ip^ tw ^fxov.
]SroTE.--The relatives is never omittinl in (Ireek as in Eng-
lish : as,
7 enjoy the yood tli'mys I have^
airoXavui dji' f.\ii> ayaOojv.
Exercise 32.
1. He took what he needed. 2. Do not deprive the country
of the territory she has ac(|uired. :^ 11" is .i fo-l hoevei- he
is. 4. I spoke in the language 1 understood. 5. Tiiey killed
b'b
KLKMKNI'AltV (iilKKlv IMIOSM COMPOSITION.
all whom tlic\y met. 0. Those wlio wei'o clioseii to enact laws,
have ^fokeii iIk; veiy law s they were clKtseii to enact. 7. If
he wer(> hei'(>, he would not adiuife t hose who transact the
aftiiirs of this (-ountry. S. SonuMjt' our cities hav(^ ])een de-
strove(l, \K I am afraid tliat wo sometimes make mistakes.
10. If we liad obeyeil the yen(>r.'il v.'ho was sot over us, we
should hav(^ conqm^red theai. i 1. There is no mark by which
to distiti-iiish the wickc.'d. 1'2. If lu; liad the ten (h-achmas
which he received as a is:\h, Ik; would s^-ivo us something.
1. The phrase; ol'-'; <rr ui'v//), a man like you, is treated as one;
word l)ut each pa ft dechiicfl : a.s,
III', (initiftcs a vtifi' lih' !l'>>i, •^api(,€rai oao (Tni avnpi.
F prahnd vieu Hkc //<>>'', i-r^.'aro. oiov; v/^as <Lv6j,a<;.
■J. The antecedent is occasionally attract;ed into t,h(> case of
the relat i\(; : as,
77ie ]>r()i>i'rt>/ irlticlh Ite left ivas tiot /uorfh rniic/i,
This is called liirnrse attractio7i.
It is found in the phrase ov^iti^i u(rTi<i <>v. rrrri/ <>w : as,
Thiro una no one Iw did xc.i, di'ploi'c,
TJi'i-p. /r((>i 'I'O one /t" did. )i<)t dospise,
()vhtvo<; oTOLi ov Kd.Tahpii'njirei'.
.".. 'i'hi> ind. is the regular mood of the I'elative clause; in
or.it io feci a : as,
I It 11/ /'r'nif/liii/ a nutu /vhom i/o/r ui/isf, lm/)r!so>i,
(ivojtii. II I It ov cijito.!. ntu
TJltij uoia lO/'ud tiii:i) itud iicarii^ ekel^av a ijKDVirav,
THE RKLATIVE.
89
But nftor ser'0!i(]ary tenses the opt. is used in the relative
chiuse
( 1 ) To expr(!ss indetinite frequency (see i< 28, 3) : as,
Wluitivcr lie (jot, he destroijed, o, n Au'/iot ^U(ij6eii>ei\
(2) In oratio ol)li(iua, for tlie pres., fut., and jierf. ind. of
oratio recta : as,
I/e said fJiat If irns Itri.iKjitKj a in<in whrmi they must im-
prison, ctTTCi' on ai^pa liyut ov dp^at oe'oi.
Note. — The inipf., aor., and plpf. of oratio recta remain un-
(•hange<l in a lehitive clause in oratio obli(iua : as,
Jit; said they told ivhat they had heard,
ciTrei' on \e$€iav a rjKova-av.
They expected that those vdiom they had sent for icouJd meet
them, jiXttl^ov toiVous ou; //eTeVe/xi/'ttv aTravTya-frT'' a.
4. TliQ re.i^ular negative of the relative clause is ov, but fxi]
is used when the clause has a. conditional force : as.
What I do not knoiv, 1 do not think I knotr, a ovk otSa, ovk
oLofiaL elSevaL (a iM^ otBa=i/ there is anything which I do not
know).
5. The verb of a conditional relative claase is assimihUed
(1) To the su])junctive or optative, if the leading verbis
subjunctive or optative.
(2) To a secondary tense of the indicative, when the lead-
ino- verb is a secondai-y tense of the indicative with av : as,
] shall he glad if all ivl 10 can will do it,
rjcrOrja-oixai iav iravTeq oo-ot av Si'i^cui^rai rorro Trotao-ti/.
(Note. If the assimilation is to the subjunctive, av is
added.) (S^ 37, 3, note.)
/ would give ichatever he demands, ^oi-qv tiv o, n aiToCr}.
I woidd have done what I could, iirpaia av d iSvvdfxrjv.
■n^
WP
mmm
90
ELEMENTARY fSREEK THOSE COMPOSITION.
IF 'i
6. Tlic relative is used in (Ireck as in Latin— tliou<rh nuicl'.
more rarely than in Latin — to exprcns (a) cnvsr, (h) pii7'pos(\
(ci rcxulf. But the indicative — and not, as in Latin, the sub-
junctive—is the mood of the relative clause : as,
{(i) } uii, (lid well to do it, KaAi')? iTroiyjaa^ os ye ravra €7rpo^a5
(cause ; (k = hpcaH,se yoK ; yi is usually added to the relative).
Thei/ congratulated the niotJu'r on Jtaving stick children,
iliaKUfu^ov Tijv fxrjTcpa ouov tckvow (.Kvprjaev.
{It) Send a 'man to the city to nndce the announcement,
Trefxipov TU^a eg tvv ttoXlu o-; ravra ayyeAei (purpose).
Note. — The verh of the relative clause of purpose is fut.
ind., oi' -after a secondary teiise^ fut. opt.
((•) Xo (>//e is so silly (IS lo he i(j)iorant of this, ouSeis ouVon
€m/6'))s hmv o-rrts rarra dyroet (result ; = ajore ravra ayvo^lv).
7. 'I'he relative with aV and the aorist subjunctive, is used
for the English present with a future or future-perfect force :
as.
Whatever lie takes, he destroys, o, -i av XdfSy SLa(j)(klf)ei.
Note. — .Vfter a secondary tense the subjun. l)ecoines opt.
and the aV is dropped.
S. The relative is not repeated in Greek. Tf the syntax
demands a change of case, awro's is used instead of the relative
in the second construction : as,
He was a kiny ichom all loved and served,
pacnXev^ tis yu ov 7rai/rcs i(pi\ovv /cat vrnqpirovv avrC,
0. The use of the relative as a connective — so common in
Latin — is i-arf! in (ilr(;ek : as,
Hayiruj this, \e departed, ravra giVwj/ (iTrrjXOev ( == Quae quum
dixisset, abiit).
V
BEIATIVF, ADVERliS.
EXEHCIKE 33.
91
1 There was no one whom he <lul m.t, wish to serve. -.
He" was a man who lived among us an,l whom alDoved 3
This is the ohject he pursues and for the sake of wh.ch he
performs every act. 4. They obtained what th,.y -1<;'':^ •^^•
Lt us make then> rulers of the country we con.,uer. 6_ Hm,
can you know what you have no experience of / . He .11
do (opt. + au) whatever he wishes. 8. We were mv.ted to see
,he house tliey had huilt («or.). 9. I'e does not hei.eve wha
Ldoes not see. 10. They had arn.s with wloch to defend
themselves (purpos.). U. I should have lost -■"«"««'
many friends I had. 12. He said that they won ,1 olK,y . n>-
one whom [§ 33, 3, (1)] the city appointed. 13 1 hey resolved
,o choose thirty men wl>o should ,lraw up laws 0«,n,» >
14 No one was so hard-hearted as to remam. lo. U 1 e 1.. U
despised men like you, he would not have heen .so g-at ^
You are asking what is unreasonable m asking us to dcse, t
thorn (cause).
§ 34.-11ELATIVE Ar>TEKBS.
1. The following are the common correhitive adverbs of
lime, place, and manner :
Then. . .n-Mn, rir.. . .St. or i.o... f<o hn, . .Ml!, .—
v,„;.„v . . . 2««. There . . . wh^re, ivraiba or «« .. "r, o..,., o. oft,.
Thence. . .whence, UtiOcv . ..oOev, oi^mx, ^vu
7 • ' -^ nl or oTTot In such a way . . . ^^S <o^^ or oi^rcus
. . . ^5,,, or 0770.9 and Tf/Se, or ravrr) . . . j), or o;rp.
2. The relative adverb takes regularly the construction of
the relative pronoun : as,
We must remain wherever ice are posted,
92
ELEMKNTARY GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION.
■mi
TJiPy escaped an heM they couldj
uTTtfjivyov ouTtus orro;? di)i(TTa iowavTO.
3. The relative adverl) ore, n^'hrn ( = at the time that) must
be distinguished from the conjunctions w?, cVci', and eVctO/y,
tvheit ( = (i/ff)' that or inat<myrh as) : as,
7 (lid it when yov, ivere icritiny,
ore (TV tyi)a(j)€<iy Tore, cyi'o toDto eVotr/cra.
When he saio fin, he came forward, at oace,
o>S (or eVct) y/xaq ct8ei', €vOv<i irfioaiiXOfv.
Inasmuch as th^y did not come out to battle^ he hcffan to
raraye the land, eVetSr/ ovk cVe^j/ccrai/ c's /^'J^X^ij i^rjLOV rijv yyjv.
8o too : As soon as, imL^ij ru;^ioTtt: as,
He set oat as soon as I arrived,
€7rct8>y ra^wrra n(pii<o(xi]v iiropeveTO'
m
SYNTAX OF "EcDS, WHILE, UNTIT..
4. Tlie following are the rules for tlie use of ew?, while,
until:
(1) "Ecus when it means while takes the indicative : as,
Do it tvhile he is asleep, ttoUl tovto tws KaOevSei.
(2) Eoj? when it means until takes
(a) 'J'hc indicative, if it refers to a definite point of past
time : as,
They remained till the general arrived,
tfieii'av eojs o orparr/yos u(/)tKcro.
(b) "Av with the subjunctive, if it refers to the future : as,
L''t tis remain near till the prison is opened,
TTCpi/ACKU/XCP' £0)5 (IV a.VOl)(dfl TO SeCTjU.tOTiyptOl'.
RRLATIVK ADVKima.
93
';hiU
\\ it ;ift,(>r a scoundarv teuso of the ind., «>r JifttM- an <.j)tat,iv(;,
thu av is dropped juid tlio sultjunclive liccomes optative : as,
Tr« z<^«</ to remain near till thn jn-isou was u/iened,
Trepie/AcVo/ACi/ co)? avoL^Oea] to Sctr/xwrf/pioi^.
T'Afc'y would fi/ht till they died,
ULa-)(i(TaLVTO av cws airoOdvoiev.
(c) A secondary tense of the indicativ<s to express an end
unattaiiied : as,
/ lomdd gladly have spoken until I had p^'rmmh'd them,
T/8ccus av BuXeyofiyjv cojs avrous tireuTa.
5. Other words for until an^ ax^n, /Ae^pt and tirre. They
take the same construction as ecus.
SYNTAX OF IlptV, BEFORE THAT.
0. The use of tt/xV, he/ore that, must 1)0 distin.i^'uisliod from
that of €(»)? :
(1) In ajflnnative sentences TrptV regularly takes the inlini-
tive : as,
'fhey sent him away he/m-e /learlny him,
u7re7r€/Ai//ttV aurov "rrpiv aKova-ai.
I will ansiver he/ore I see you,
diTOKptvaiix7)v av Trpiv v/au? ISelv,
(2) After a negative, irpCv takes
{a) The indicative, when referring to a definite ]>oint of
past time : as,
Since they had not killed them all hefore the ship
arrived,
i-n-d ov SucjiOeipav Travras Trplv i] vav^ acjiCKeTo.
(b) "Av with the subjunctive, when referring to tlie future :
as,
/ ought not to depart until I am punished,
ov v/n; fxe uTTiXOiiv Trplv av StL BLKrjv.
1.
mmmm
mmm
94
KLRMENTARY ORREK PROftR OOMPOfllTIOV.
lUii, after a sccoiulary toiisn of ilio iiid., or after nu opt.nivc,
the; at' is dropped and tlio suhjiuiutivo becomes optativ(! : as,
lleforhiula any one to shoot urttil Cyrus was satlsjlrj,
ttTTi/yopeuc fjiy)f>€va /SiiWtLV irpXv KDpos €>7rA.7;(r6ctr/ (§ .'50, 3).
//« will not dine before you come, om av Senrvotrj TrfAv cA^ois.
Note.— 'Kw9 and -n-fuv supplement each other, "Kw^ is al-
ways preceded hy an atfirmdtive sentence; ; irpCv by a nryaf.irc,
except in the infinitive construction.
Exercise 34.
1. Follow wherever I knul. 2. They occupied the jrniund
wherever it was narrow. 3. Wherever tliey encamp they
make a trench. 4. We remained until they sailed away.
T). Let the treaty remain in force till I come. 6. Wait untd
you h^arn the rest. 7. Gather roses while you may. 8. I
would have remained quiet until all the rest had spoken.
9. Have hope until you learn the truth. 10. Remain near
until we disperse the crowd. 11. Wait until a man is dc^ad
before you call him happy. 1 2. When their fleet had been
defeated, they began to be despondent. 13. When spring
comes, the flowers bloom. 14. When you do your duty, you
will prosper. 15. When they had refitted their ships, they
coasted along towards Naupactus.
^'W
^ 35.— CAUSAL AND CONCESSIVE CLAUSES.
1. Adverbial clauses stating the ground or cause of the
principal assertion are called caused adverbial clauses.
2. Tausal adverbial clauses ai-e introduced by on or ^tun,
brcaase; or by cVetSv, tTret, or w^, inasmuch as (Lat. quoniam).
CAUSA r, AND CONCESSIVK CLAUSES.
95
>f the
:\, Tl.r vcrl.ofacausaludvcrl.iul rlauseMH in ih. in-licat i vr
after l)()tli priiiiiiry iuid sccoiidary toiiscs : us,
Thru conrincetf ns vioiw. raslhj b<'.mns>- thr inatt<r /r<<.s-
pJn'iti,
Tlu5 neujative is ov : as,
Since that is not the rnx'\ I ""'// //" <iirnij,
4 But when it is implied that the niusn is assi-.u-l m. (hr
authority ..f another, tho optative- is used insfad of th.-
indicative ; as,
The,/ ah'sed him heea„xe (as then mi</) he di<l vnt Inul
them vat to battle,
5. Tnstead of the causal clause, Cr.H'k often uses:
(1) The participle: as, •
The ThesmHaus, hecaase Irft n Hsapportr,!, jnia^d the
Persians,
(2) Ata with the articles and inhnitive : ;us,
He v-as sm-ed because he teas ,ii>f there,
iiTMOi} ^ta TO IJ.IJ -(ipcliai.
G. ALTiior.ni, or .r... (/; in concess^^•e clauses, is koI d. or
K^v {kuI iau) and not even if, cm'S' d or (u'.S' idv.
Concessive clauses take the construction of the eonditionai
sentence (see ^ .'50) : as,
/ iivd do it th(> f perish,
rovTO Trpd^u) ^'''il' 'I'oOavu).
I
mmm
96
km:mi:ntai{Y cukkk puosk ((tMcosiriov.
Hut insl(>;i(I of Kiu ci ;iinl u liliitc veil), Kiuir^it willi I'm'
participlt! is oricii used ; as,
7'//'' inuniilnf' tho' iumne vas/it/jll/rd,
KULnef) /i.ui't(i'j8r/s oi'»ra ij vTn'xry^an^ dnifii),
Kxi'.HCisi: :}j.
I. Thcv could not do it because it was inipossiblo. 2. Ho
is (Icsiioiidciit hcfuusc lu! must die, though dcitli is coiiiiuon
to all. ."{. As it was cold, they lit a i'm\ 1. Jloiucr praises
him liccuusc (as lie says) lu; was a i^ood king'. 5. As they are
the victors, h^t them remove their dead. 0. Although you
are not good at rcniicmhcring, still remcmher this. 7. They
fought until darkness came on. S. K\cn if ho were to pay
the money into the hank, T should rc-civc it. 1). They would
not have been ];ut to d(!ath, even if they had surrenilered on
this ai-count [■< 19, 1, (2)]. 10. We can not desert the Athe-
nians because our wives and children aic among them. 11.
He would not be invite(l, c\('ii if he were rich. \'2. Take care
that 3'ou use words which all can understand. 1."^. 1 wouhl
choose li))e!-ty in ]>refercncc to (ai'Ti' + //'//.) everything I
possess. •
II
i^nc;.— EXPRESSION OF A WISH.
1. The connnon particles for expressing a w'ish are uBi and
€t yii/j, ! that.
2. A wish that refiM-s to the future and may therefore l)e
realizi^d, is expressed by the o2:>tative with or without dB(.\ as,
May you he liajrpy, elOe evBatfxwv yeVoio.
May you be more fortunate than /,
yeVotu euTvp^e'trrc/oos e/Aou.
KXI'HKSHION Ol' A WISH.
yr
'^. A wish Uiat ciui >i»f l.(^ iojiIi/(m1 is oxprnss«Ml ))y eWe and
i,l,o iinpf. or aor. iiuli.-. tiu! //«/>/: irxi., if llin wisli is n'Jt\n'vvi\
i,) til.! i.roseiit; the um: iii.l., if liu^ wis!, is ivfeiTc.l to tho
jtast ; as,
Of that yon. had (now) a heltrr nmloratanding,
1 wish Ihid I had been with you, tlHc aoi (rvv€ytv6fini'.
4. Tho iii',«;ativ(> i)articlo in exprossiug a wish is [ly: as,
God forbid ! ji)^ yivoiTo (lit. may it not l»',).
I ivirih that he had not done it,
€l6€ tovto fJiyj CTTpatcr.
5. Tlio inipf. and acf. of 0^,0X0,, to owr, aro also uso<l_with
(,r without ci-'^e— to express ;i wish that ciuvnol. he .■...•lii/ecl :
as,
! that I had di^.d on that day,
G. Tiio forms used for the expression of a wish ai-e really
protases of common types of th.^ conditional sentence (J^ 30).
Thus- 0/ that this ma>i pron- true, (.lOt. tovto aXijOk yivoiTo =
d rorro ,U.;^c9 yivo.To', KaXCo.J.v exot (-If this should prove
true, it would he well). 0! that this n-rre trnr, dde tovto
akqOh iyiyy^ro - et tovto iWqOk iyiyvero, kuXu,^ av elx^v ( - Tf this
were true, it would 1)0 well).
EXKKCISE •"Hi.
4
1. ! that Socrates were now Mlive. 2. O ! that the wise
managed the ailairs of the state. 3. I wish that {.We) the
doctor had bw'ii there; ; the child would not have died. 4. O !
that we had n..t put them to the sword. 5. .May you he
punished for vour injustice {r/e7i.) ! 0. ISlay our army be vic-
torious : 7. Although it is hard to hear, still we nuist bear it.
98
ELEMKNTARY GREEK PROSi: COMPOSITION'.
8. 1)<» not |)i'()vi(l(i yourself witli nionoy {arc.) tor (t,) tli"
jounu'V. !•. (> '. tliJit those j,';itos wvvv. now oj)cn, 10. No one
i«.s<) wise ;is not soiiietiujes to err. U. Are not the l/iesshii^'^
of life ini»i-e numerous than its evils? 12. ]\Iay I live no
lojiLjcr, if r must sec sueh things as this ! 1.3. All those who
wished to live, (lied a shameful death. 14. They .sent a herald
to Athens to announce that the island liad ])een taken.
!^ 37.
THK IXDIRECT QUF.STrOX,
1. A (luestion d(>})en(ient upon a v(>rl) of saying, thinking,
knowing or the like, is called an hidirrcl qncstiou,.
•2. Interrogative adverl)S and jtronouns (J^ i3, 1) when used
in an indirect question, have usually o i)relixed. Tlius : //ow
(/r«'(U, oTTocrnq. What like, (>Troio<;. IIdic, otto)?. So too : Who,
(Vrt? (direct = Tis).
3. After a pi-imary tense the verb of the indirect (juestion
is in the indicative and not, as in Latin, in the subjunctive:
as,
/ do Hot knoiv who he is,
ox)K oi^u, o(rns co-TiV ( = nescio quis sit).
After a s(;condary tense the indicative regularly becomes
optative; but, for the sake of vividness, both the mood of the
dii'ect question and the form of tlje direct interrogative pro-
noun or adverb le.ay be kept unchanged (graphic secjuence^ as,
/ asked him ivhat he loas doing, ripofxyjv avrov, o, n Troioir),
or, graphic sec^uen-je, n Trotet. (Direct question = tl Troiets ;)
?SOTh:. — The neuter of oori?, who (indirect^ is written o, n,
to distinguish it from oVi, that, because.
THE INDIKHCT QUESTION.
99
Th.' in.pf. iuul i.lpf. of tl»<^ •'■"■•M-t, (lucsti.... mniiii. un-
chiin^^cd in the iiuliroct : Jis,
/ ad->'d him hoio much he used to <ilr'% v/">/^'/'' ottotm' i^O^ov.
An aor. ind. genorally roin.ains unohangr,!, in ord(M- t^) avoid
confusion with the form of the <Iehberatire question (^ :'.7, A) : as,
/ asked what he had done, r)p6[xy]v rt ertp<i<rer.
4. When a suhjunetive is found in an indirect .juestion, it
is the deliberatv-e sui)junctivc [§ 25, 1, (2)] : as,
/ do not know vhere to turn, ovk olSa o-ot r/xt-o'/xui.
(Direct question = ttoI rpaTrw/xat ; where shall J tv ni ?)
After a secondary tense this subjunctive regularly l.ec.mies
optative : as,
/ did not hioiv tvhere to turn,
OVK )'\^ilV OTTOl Tpair()l[l7]l'.
5. Whether, in an indirect ^luestion, is ,1 (negative /.v)) : as,
Let us consider vheth-r this is not so,
o-KOTrCjfJiCV d TovTo fxij ovrojs e'xet.
Whether. . .or, is dr. . . . dre or d. . -v, rather than -.cn.pov
.. .y) (the usual form in the direct question).
Ife asked whethr they gave up the cAty or not,
yjl>€-o dre Trape^uiKav tijv tto'Xu/ dne ixrj.
G When a question is repeated by the person of whom it is
asked, the indirect form of the pronoun or adverb is used in-
stead of the direct : as,
What are you doing ? ri Trotas ;
What am I doing ? {do you say), o, n ttoi^ ;
Ir!
7. Relative pi
•onouns and adverbs ar.^ sonuUmes usee
I for
100
ELKMKNTARY GREEK PROSE COMPOSITIOV.
iiitei'fogjitivo, and, vice versa, iiit(;n'()giiti\(; pronouns anil ad-
verbs for relali\'c : as,
/ do not k)ww who you are, ovk ol8a ()<; et (for ("(rri? c7).
A/l ivho kuejv, TraiTCS oTrocroi lyvuicrav (for —drra ("xroi).
Exercise 37.
1. Ask them wliat they intend to do a1)out it. 2. They
did not know who we wei'e. 3. Consider whether }ou ha\e
done anycHie any harm. 4. They vill wonder ^vhere you are
coming from. 5. I knew how (Jjc) jealous the gods were. G.
If you wish to know what you are, look at the monuments of
the dead. 7. They delil)erated whether they should approach
])y sea or by land. 8. I will tell you what its nature was. 9.
You see in what straits we ai'e. 10. He did not know where
in the world he was. 11. They were at a loss what to do.
12. He does not know whether his good fortune will last till
evenim; oi* not. 13. Thev wondered what it was.
^5 38.— THE INFINITIVE.
1, Verbs followed by the infinitive in English are followed
by the infinitive in (Jreek : as.
He tvishes to remain, jSovXerai /xeVeti/.
He iiUetids to depart, fiiavofnai dTreXOeiy.
I told them not to fi(jht, etTroj' avroU /x?) jxayj^crOai.
2. An infinitive is added in Greek, as in English, to nouns,
adjectives, and xcrl^s to limit or explain their meaning : as,
A conn try to dwell in, x^P"'- otKeiv.
Pleasant to hear, rySu aKovetv.
He came to see us, rjXOci' rifxaq loilv.
This is called the epexeyetical iujlnitive (ityjyeofiaL, r.rplai)i).
TlIK INFINITIVE.
101
Note. — Tlie infinitive, liowovor, is not often used, as in
the last ex.nnple, to express a purpose, lie came to ,sv>« n^, is
usually, ifkOi-V Iva. ry^as Itnn.
3. The infinitive with the article is used as a noun and may
translate the English infinitive used as a noun, the English
participial noun in ing, and certain abstract nouns : as,
To see is to believe, to l^clv mtl to ttkjtcvuv.
We learn by teaching, roi SiSao-Kcir /xai/^dvo/xei/.
Silence is better than speech,
TO aiyav KpuxTov cVti tov AaAttv.
4. The infinitive, though used as a noun, takes the usual
adjuncts of the verb— a subject, an object, or an adverb : as,
Tlte city was taken through his not being there,
r/ 7To\ts iXijffiOr] Sta to avrov jxi] irapehat.
Note. The negative with the infinitive is /xr). But after
ver])S of thinking it is ov or fx.^ according as the negative is
emphatic or not.
5. The genitive of the article with the; infinitive is used to
express a 2^u7yose : as,
lie ran aivay to escape death, tt7r€8/)a toD ai/ ATTnOaven.
(). The subject of the infinitive, if different from the sub-
j(H't of the main v(!rb, is in the accusative : as,
He thought that all had spoken, iaero vravra? dprjKevai.
7. The subject of the infinitive, if the same as the subject
of the main verb, is, unless emphatic, omitted ; as,
They said they won hi do it, £>a(rai' -no'iauv.
When em])hatic, it is expressed (for all p(>rsons) by «vto9,
but in the noni. and not, as in Latin, in fin- acr. : as.
Yon said you ivould do it, €</.r;s auros Troiryaar
102 ELEMENTARY GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION.
He said that Nlcias avd vot HE tms general,
ovK tcjifj ai'Toq aAAa NtKt'ai/ (TrpaT'oytlv.
^OTE.—Say...not (Lat. nc-o) is o^ cf^-qfj-i, tl.e not being
added, not to the inf. but to the main verb.
8 So too a noun or an adj. with an inf., when referring to
the subject of the main verb, is in the nom. ; when referrmg
to some other word in tlie sentences is in the case of the word
to wliicli it refers : as,
lie said he fvas a (jod, c^r/ 6'eos €^^'a^
The city was taken through its belmj unjortijied,
(pronoun omitted ; adj. in num.).
/ hrseerh yon to he zealous,
<)i()ixai (Tov TTpoOvfxov ch'tu.
You may become tcise, Uar-l croi rroc^w yamrOai.
Exercise -'58.
1 To vrv is human, to forgive divine. 2. lie said that he
would .ussistthem himself. 3. He is worthy to be admired.
1 Let us exhort them not to be cruel. 5. She was a wonder
to behold. 6. They said they had hopes of taking the city.
7 They gained the day by deceiving the enemy. 8. I per-
suaded them that I was wise. 9. This city was fortitied that
ihe enemy might not ravage the country. 10. It is the man s
part to aciuire, the woman's to keep. 1 I. U is better to 1h.
envied than to be pitied. 12. They d.'spiscd olHce because
they were not ambitious. 13. We get knowledge by sensation
and perception. 14. Identity of interest cements trieiulship.
m. He wished to be friends with the powerful in order to
escape punishment.
THE INMNITIVE.
103
§ 39. —1 N F I N IT J V E (Continued).
1. For the syntax of verbs of sai/iv<j, sec § 2, 3,
2. Verbs of thinMruj, hopbuj, expecting, promising Jiiid the
r.ke, govern the infinitive : as,
He thought that v^e mere present,
ClOpUTtV 17/XaS 7r(tf)€LUai.
This inf. is usually pres. or aor., but it is /W^, if future time
is to bo strongly marked, and (i<>r. ivith di^, if the inf. is condi
tional : as,
He hopes to get the money,
fXTTi^ct Xa/Sctv TO apyvpiov.
They jn'omised that they would give up the captives,
vTTi(T\ovTo uTToScocreii' Toiis ai;(/x,aXciJTOUS.
They thought that we would come,
Ivojxurav rjp.a^ av eXOiiV.
Verbs op negative notion (hinder, deny, etc.).
3. After verbs of negative notion, such as hinder {ku>Xv<,)),
deny {apvioiiai), doubt (aTrtrrrtaj), forbid (uTrayopei'oj), a d(!-
pendent infinitive is used, with a redundant iiy to strengthen
ilie negative notion : as,
They jyrevented me from coming, iKo'Avcrdv fxe pij iXOeiv.
I deny that he did it, aTrapvoip-aL avrov fii) irpd^aL.
Note. Verbs of hindering irnxy take the genitive of the
article with the inf.: as,
Tliry prei-e^ited me from coming, iKuWvmu' fie tov //.*; iXOiw.
4. When a negative is joined to the verb of negative notion
the redundant /xr) becomes fiyj ov : :.••>
Nothing prevents us from doing It,
Ovhkv KOjAvCt jXT] ov TOVTO TTOULV.
104
Kr.KMKNTAUY r.KliElC PUOSB COMPOSITION.
I
I
Syntax of 'ilfrre and 'Iv// w.
5. "ila-e Nviili tli(i iulitiitivo is iis(>(l to oxpn^ss n result : iis,
Ife is foolish evonyh to rhoosr mir iiisf''(i'l <>/ pracc,
So too otos and owos (,^ 3'2, 1 ) : as,
They are men capable of daiichiy, uIol dmv opxe'iirOnL.
Occupying their oivii pastures enough to (jet a Hriny ojj
them,
But when used of an actual fact oVre takes tlic indicative:
as,
He tvas foolish enough to choose icar,
ovTO)^ dvoT/ros r/v wore iroXcfJiov cI'Aero ( = so that he chose . . ).
G. 'E(^' w or ey Jt€ is used with the infinitive to express, On.
condition that: as,
We discharge yon. on condition that yon will no longer
study ])hilosoj)hy,
MjiUjiiv fre l(f ('ore fxrjKi-t (jiiXoa-ofpeiv.
The fut. ind., however, is often used instead of the inf.: as,
/ will speak on condition that yon liold your tongue,
Xi^oi €^' (h (TLyyayj.
7. MeXAo), / am about to, is followcnl hy the inf.— usually
the fut. inf., Imt also th(^ pres. or aor.: as,
I am going to tcrite, /xeXVu yixxif/eu' {ypii.(peiv or ypd^m).
8. It is said that (Xeyopu), it is right that (OLKauk e/'/xi), and
it s"r)ns that {^ioKel) are followed by the inf., hut require a
personal construction : as.
It was said that there loei'e a hundred of them,
ty,
■■ they
1 <^
It is right that I should say, 8tKat(j<j ei/xt eiVeii/.
TIIH I'AirriCII'LK
lOD
iis.
'//'
1). rht> iuiinitivo jibsoluto is found in tlio following; plirascs :
So to s<(i/, o>s el-elr. In one >n>rf/, i'>^ aviTo/^o)? (<»r (Tvi'e\6t^Ti)
tiTteli'. To nifdce a (jnc.ss, o,c eiVrumt. As /(()' <is I knoir, Ihtov
jL ddeviu. Ai'iinrndlij, cos ^(iKelr. Almost, oXlyuv h7.v.^ Far
from it, TToXXov Selv. WlUliKjlij ot h-ost, ckoji' dvai. Noiv at
Irast, TO lar ctvat. As far as he is concerned, to cV eVetVo) elmi.
Exercise 30.
1. They pi-oraiscd tliat they would siirrcndor their ;inns.
•1. lie thoui^dit tliut it was sufficient to praise those who did
well and to refrain, frmn praising; tliosii wlio (hd ill. 3. lie
thought that they would iirwi- yield, at least, willingly. h It
is right that 1 should rec(>i\e even great. t r(«\vards than these,
n. I will fo!-l)id th(«in to he present, (k Here (o8e) comes— to
make a guess— the king himself. 7. This did not prevent
them from ravaging tiie country. S. They ask(Ml him whether
ho intended to remain or not. 0. llc^ thought that we would
not be able to live there on account of the cold. 10. T wdl
let you go on condition that you carry away your dead. 1 1.
They were chosen on condition that they sluadddraw up laws.
12. He was powerful enough to be able to break this law.
13. You are so foolish that you hope to comjuer.
^40.— THK PAllTTCTPLE.
1. English suboi'dinate clauses beginning with he >rho, they
,rho ov with H'heu, while, if, hreans>', althmujk, may be express-
rd in Greek by the participle : as,
They who ask shall reeeire, ol ultovvtc^ Xyij/ovTai.
When he had said this, h' arnf airay,
Tat'Ttt chriov aTrry/Vc'ei^
They lill'J hi 1)1 "-hi If III' a-a.^ a:<leep,
OLTtiKTUvav avTW et'oovra.
IOC)
KLKMIINTAKV (iUKEIv I'liOSK COM P()SrnO>f.
/■/' / iro'r fo Iirttr /7, / .^holllil not I'Olltlhl, n!/c)U,
KurtL </Koi'fras avK av (T imtt ij<T at fu.
I luirr amir, on (his account, hccavsi' I irlsh to sre him,
TovTuv 'ivcKa 7jK<i>, jSovXn [xei'o'i tf^eu- ai'roi'.
Voii /nit hint to (h-oth d/fhowjh In' mis yont on-nconntripimn,
r>TTeKT€UUT€ ahnv, TToXiTrju v/jhei^ov ("nra. {\n this sense, liow-
cvci-, /catVep is usually added to the participle).
•2. The (Ireek participle may ofteu Ix; used for the English
pai-ticipial noun in imj with a preposition, expressing means
or a/fendant circnmsian.ccs : as,
They J ire by plundering, Xifi^oixevoL ^mctlv.
'They vithdrew tuifhont dolny any harm,
:?. Apart, therefore, from its attributive force, the Greek
partici})le is used to exprvss tlnn', condition, reason, co7icessio)i,
means, or attendant circumstances.
4. 'iU, as. on the ground that, is often added to the participle
to express a j-eason allegetl : as,
Th'>y am indignant because (as they allegr) they are dejn'ivcd
of emry thing, dyai/aKTot'o-tr o)s a~€(TTefnjfX€voL rravTuyv.
5. The case absohite in Greek is the genitive : as,
Tltey did it when the king teas abroad,
rovTo l~ou]<Jitr, rov /:?a(rtXeo)s aTroST^/xoirros.
The <'(mitive ahsolute shouhl propei'ly introducf; a new sub-
ject. Thus : When they had done this, they loent away, is
7oL'7(; -r.ujiTiiVTt^ (not TTOiipavTiuv avrm) aTiiiXOov.
XoTE. 'iU may be added to tlu; g(!nitive absolute of the
reason allegetl : as.
He. srn,t r(ni.7id tcord as a, battle axis imminent.
Tin: rAllTI(!IlM,K
lo;
T). Tho partioipV. of imperttonal vorlw is used in tin- (neuter)
accusative absolute : as,
Whrn you had a chancp., yon ^rouhl not do if,
i^ov ovK rjOekr'iiraTi (lit., if, Ip'in.y j)ossl/>/>').
So too : Whe)i it />>• hecotniity, TTfnxTrJKov. W/n/i it /,s your
(hify, Mov. Wlicii it had been irsolml, dn^av <n' dttioyiUi'ov (from
doKO., it is resolvi'd). When it had h'en said, dpyy.iiui'. It
being possible (^impossible), w Suvuroi/ (a^vvarov).
EXKRCISK -id.
1. Wo will go away as the sun is setting. 2. These horse-
men shoot while they are Hying. :'>. Though it was in your
power to choos(; peace, you chose war. 4. Those who seek
shall find. 5. When the enemy arrived we had gone. f». \\'e
shall escape ))y running away. 7. It is ditlicult to speak to
the stomach because it has no ears. 8. You will Ix; happy, if
you know yourself. 9. Men are less indigmmt when sulVering
violence than when suffering wrong. 10. They condemn(>d
him to death on the ground that he had connuitted impiety.
II. Po not attempt many things, it being impossi])le to do
many things well. ll'. They did not thiidc that he would
dare to light with them. 13. Truth, often long obscured, at
last prevails.
as.
§ 41.— PAIITTCTPLE (Continued).
1. The ordinary negative with the participle is ov : as.
Those who bronyht no aid escaped safe and sound,
oi ov ^oy6rj(javTi<i, vyul<i d-yjXOov.
But fxri is used when the participle has a conditional force :
yVie man vho h<(s 'iiercr been, a s'vrant will never make a
good master,
/\6was ovTTor av yf.voiTu deaTruri
M
y
1 OS
KLEMKNTAUV CKKEK I'UOHK COMI'OHITION,
2. ( )t' t wu (•(» ordiM.'ilt^ scrlts iii
Kwa\
ISll ('()tUl('(
\rr\ I
»\' IIIKl
r' ■
(IMC is iisuiilly to 1)(! oxprcsst'd in (Ji'cck by ;i i)iU'ticii)l(' : as,
Jiifte din' rnadeiun )W, avaardvTi'i K(iTaifji}(l)ur(UTOe.
3. Tlu; future; particiitlo is used to (•xi)i'(!ss n piirpoar .- ;is,
/ Iiavr route to xf"//, yKci /ici'iov.
'lis is julded to cxpfess the i>i'>sinned intenttou : as,
He s- h.nl Ji'im ir'ith fin' iitfciifion of klU'iinj li'uii,
4. Verbs ineaniui^ fo kiioin {yiyvmrKM), )><rr< ire. (a«r^(uo/x(u),
rnnnuhrr {fi.ifir,]f>ui), /<>V<irt (cViAav^ai'o/''"), ■''•/""'' (f/mVa;), oc-
knoirJi'ilijc {ofwXoyso)), cn.-in (-Travofiat), nnitlniie (^tartAeo)), ./';"/
sluuno, ((u'(rxi'i'o/xfu), /pel ]">/ (x'i'7>"»), '^'"^ a/nnmuce (ayyiWio),
.ii-o usually followed ])y the participle instead of the inf. or
iitmu elause with on : as,
/A; knefv that death u;as common to all,
iyviD BdvaTov koivov ovtul Ttaaiv.
5. The jiarticiple, when used in this w;iy for the inf , follows
th(> syntax of the inf. (see i^ 38, G-S) : as,
/ hiew thai I ivas mortal,
i]hf.iv 9vi)To<: oil' (pronoun omitted ; part, in noin.).
/ am conscious that I am a'lse,
(TvvoL^a (TO(j)o^ o)U, or <TVVOi8a ifxavTo) (rotpuj ovtl.
Ife perceived that the boy ivonid die,
i'laOero tov TraiSa av Oavovra (direct = ai' Omoi, vill die).
(i. If, liowever, the verb of kaowiv// is itself ;; participle,
it takes the inf. instead of the participle : as,
Percf'ir'uni ijidt in' should not j)iTsnad(- t,}n:yii,
aifr6'f)/x6i'os ovK tiv TTti^en/ aurous.
THK I'AUTK'Il'LF,
100
(ij
7. Ti7X'U'<" (/'"/V""), XovOiino (rsni/ir ,n>l)rr of) ;ui(l «/>^>(a'
((f//7ic'iy>«<!r), arc joined with tlic |.;irt icilil*' ; as,
He hd/tpi'iit'f ft) in' jtr'S'iif, tV)'^^€ ■ziipon'.
Ifr ('iif«'n''l .seci'ct/i/, tXdOiv ilinXOotv.
He arrived before us, itjiHaaev r//xf7s (K/)iKo/iero<;.
S. \?i\n; juid ii.avti>(k {eri(lr„l)'.iyv joined willi tlio partic-jplc,
Iml r('(iuiiH' ;i personal construction : as,
// la evident that he is mud, ^\ik Ittl {uuvofxevix;.
\). Tho following words ar<' joine(l idionialieidly to tlu^
purticiplo : d-e ov out, imtsnine/i as: er'^'s and i.vriKu, iminrdi-
afe/i/ ; afj.a, ivilh, and /xctu^'u', in t/tr midst of: as,
huismnch as he was a rhihf, he ?ras pleased,
are ttuis oji', rjncTo.
He died as soon as he 7r((s horn,
Ci'Bi'i; yGi'o//.€i'os aireOavei.
Exarfh/ at the hef/iiininf/ o/sj>rinfj,
u/xa 7jf)L dp;(()/xei a>.
7'his checked me in the midst of mi/ t(dh,
ifxk fiera^v Xiyovra enoT^^e raDra.
10. The participle is used to express flu; following- : Atjirst,
,\fiXoiuiW. At last, reXevrCiV. QnirkI >/,avvira^. Aftrr sometime,
kaXiiruyv xpwoi'. ^Vith, t'x'-Ji', uy^''' '/'£>""> <"" XP"V«''"^^-
EXERCISK 11.
1. He l<new that an altack would be made. 2. They are
pushing on to pitch ui.oii a place to encamp. :V They knew
that they had been deceived. 1. He came to announce that
your father was no more. 5. T shall n.n-er c<>as(^ to struggle.
(',. lie rejoiced in Ix'ing i)raised. 7. They sent us to eltect
w
hat we could. S. It happenet
I that thert! were about fifty of
no
KLEMKNTAIlY OKEKK PltOSK TOM POSITION'.
Ilicm. !>. They saliilnl liiin, ili(>u«,'l» lU'^y know tliui hr wii^
l)(>iii" led to (Icatli. 10. Tlicy firnvsUMl ;in(l 1«mI liiiiMiw.i) , i;i
tytidiiii; lo kill liim. 1 1. Tako ilio lufmaiil tlo.L? liiiii. 12. Slto
caiiH^ l«» her t'jitlicr with \u'V son. l-"^. Lvt us attack Ukmii
hilt! cn)ssiii<'. 11. The man who does not beliovo is wrotcli(Ml.
w
I
m
§42._VEliJ;ALS IN TEOii.
1. The verbal in tc'o? (Lat. 7i(Iits) expresses duty or neces-
sity : as, Aure'o?, rn(/uiriug to be loosed ( = solvendus).
2. Voi-bals in rens arc used :
(1) rrrxonaVji, agreeini^ with the subject: as,
Oitr conntnj mnxt ln> bi'vejitrd hij us,
(2) hnprrsonall !i, in the neuter sing, or pi., and governing
the case of the verb from which they are formed : as,
You must hear it, oto-Tcor Iml raSc vjxlv.
We mnst obey the laws, -rrutniov eari t(hs vojitots.
They voted that they mnst (jo to war,
iil/TjcjiuravTo TroXe/xr/Tc'a clmt (neut. plur. ).
Note. If the verbal governs the gen. or dat., the imper-
.sonal construction must be used : as,
We should desire rvisdom, rrj^ a-ocpui^ inLOvfirjTtov icrTiV.
We itiiist set about the work, tm epyio €TrLX^Lf>r]Tiuv cVtiV.
.3. Th(^ name of the agent after the verl)al in r€o? is in tlie
dative ; but, if the \'(u-bal itself governs the dative, the agent
is expressed by vm') i^ud the genitive : as,
Yo'ii 7»,(r;,'. iiot eiivy them,,
OV (t)0oV7JT€OV ftTTU' avrot? V<p VfXiDV.
OIIATIO OIU.IQUA.
Ill
NoTi:. 'Hh- vcrliiil ill rt'us is foniinl iVmn i|h> stnn ..»' tlir
I. u<»r. pass., 1)}' <lir)i>i>iii,i,' IImi aiixiiK'iil, ainl cliuri^in.L,' Oiji' into
T€os-. A lahiiil, lu't'om tlin sin(>(>t,li dental r, hoodtiioH n, ami a
.1,'uttunil K : Tluis from rtiYAo M. a. pass., cVcaj-%) c-oinos
TTctfrrtos. From Aa/i/i(mu ( 1 . a. pass., A»)(^^7/r) comes A//7rr«(is.
From SiojKO) (I. a. pass., ih<!)xpyiv) comes 8io>Kreo?.
K.XKIU'ISK 12.
1. A patriot must l)e jnd^jed l)y liis acts and not, l)y liis
Nv..rds. '2. Wo must lu.t avoid work. .'5. Man must not
be Inmoured before tlie trutli. I. V«»u should not eonccal
tills fnmi your parents. 5. If they aiv found ^'uilty of trea.son,
they must be condemned to death, (i. We .should niak(Mis(>
of this opportunity. 7. \V(^ si lould aecustoru ourselves to be
•gentle. H. I do not know how anyone will escape from (Jod.
9. When life is burden.some {(/m. nh.s.), death becomes a
welcome refuge. 10. The law prevents them from f<.llowing
their own natures. 11. They surrendered on condition that
all their lives should be .spared. 1 2. lie saihid away intending
to carry on war with them.
§ 43.— ORATIO OBLigUA.
1. A statement dependent on a v(>rb of saj/hif/, tJilnkui;/,
knoioiwj, ashhuj, or the like, is said to be in orafm obliqmt. or
I ndirect narraiion.
' 2. There are in (Ireek four connnon forms of oratio obliipia :
(1) The infinitive, after verbs of s(tyin<j and flunkiny.
(2) The noun-clause with I'm or .o.-, after verbs of my'iny.
(3) The participle, after verbs of knowing.
(4) The indirect .|uostion, after verbs of asking.
I
."^ • .
112
KLKMKNTAHY (;REKI\ PUOSK rOMPOSlTION,
.';. iiXc('|»t, Ae'yo) Juid (Ittov, which i'(m|uuo oVt or ojs, vorhs of
sdi/lii;/ take Ihf inf. : Jis,
I/i' stLi/s flinf lliri/ (ti'f irrifliKJ, (^qin (ivruv^ y/xn/j^ii'.
7/(3 ,<^itlil tJuU tJtaif iDPTc irvltiii'j, uf)/] arrui's yiu'ujicu' (i>r. reel. -
ypdijxwin, they arc- wrlttiu/).
lie sai/s that ihe/j tniH writi',, (jjrjiTi awrous ypdij/av.
lie stfid fhiif iJicy wonid ivrite, (.(pr] avrovs ypdij/eu', for. roct. —
ypdifjovin, the// null write).
He sai/s fJiat theij have unntfen, ^7/frt (wrovq yeypacpevdi.
He said that they had written,^ €(fi'r] avTot's ye-ypa(/>eVa(, (or. red. —
yeypdtpaai., tli>y have ■ivrifteii).
Note. — Tlio tiMise of oratio rocta — which iti Ei\iL,'lish oratio
ol)li(iua is cliaiiijctl aft(n" a secondary tense into the correspond-
ing past toiisc — roniains unchaiiujed in (Jr(;ck oratio ol)H«[ua.
Hence tlio important rule : /// /rai/slatiny H/iy. oratio ohliqiia
into Greek, Jiiidjirfd the Ewj. anifio 'fi'da ; the tense of the Eng.
oratio rerta is the tense of the (''ri'ck oratio oldvput. Thus : 7
said that I had dove 'irromj, ajnji' ryrt/KT^/ceVat (or, r. —7j()iKt]Ka, I
have done fvroiif/). [I'^>r ilii.s us(i of llie inf., see ^-'^i*^, 7]. They
said thai lie von Id disl roy a yreat emorrc, cV/jacrai/ avrov peydXiji'
up^yji' Ki/raAwreii/ (or. r. = KaraXrrrei, he wilJ dest'roy).
4. Tlic pi'oseut inf., however, is used in oratio obhqua foi-
tlio iinpf. ind. of oratio r<'cta, aiKl ii!.j pf. inf. for the plpf.
iiid. : as,
He said he itsol to he at a loss, li^mj diTopdv (or. rect. =
yiTrujKivv, J used to be at a loss).
He soys la' had ji'st dinrd a-loa tn' enitte,
(j>r)(n SeSctTTvrjKevai dpri, ore yXOofiw.
o. If thei'O is an a'p with tlui \ov\) in oratio recta, it is re-
tained with lh(> inf. in oratio ohHcpia : as.
He said that he iroidd, (jivr iru, drachmas, f.^rj hovxai av Scku
ZpayQid^i (or. r. =Suir}u au, 1 'anil yii'c).
OllATIO OlSLTQUA.
113
•1)S of
!Ct.
ect. =
ecfc. =
oi'atio
q)oiid-
)li([ua,
hi /qua
e Eng.
lus : /
c'^Ka, /
Tlipy
ua for
plpf.
t, is ro-
ai' 0(.Kix.
0. Th(>. iiif. is used williout a verb of sayliuj or ihinkhuj cx-
pii.'sscd, to give the reason for a previous statement : as,
lie iliomjU he had made a mistake. For, if he had (/one {he
ihoiKjht) he should have taken the city, eSoKci aiiapTilv. kXfiv yap
av T7/r 7ro/\tv, el ijXOev.
Note. -For the syntax of verbs of thinking, see § :}9, 2.
7. Tlio noun-clause with on and the ind., may be used after
nil verbs of saying except <^7?/xi and flaKOi which re<iuire the
inf. : as,
He says that they are ivriting, Xcyet on ypdibovaiv.
After a secondary tense, the verb of the 5n-clause regularly
becomes optative (the tense remaining unchang(Kl) : as,
He said that they were writing, eXe^ev on ypdcpoLeu (or. r. =
ypdipovai, they are writing).
From a desire, however,— for the sake of vividness— to re-
present the past as present, the mood (as well as the tense) is
often kept unchanged : as,
He said that they were writing, eke^ev otl yfM<povmv.
This is called graphic sequence.
8. The impf. and plpf. of oratio recta remain unchanged in
the on-clause in oratio obliqua : as.
He said that it was not so in his time,
iXe^ev I'm ol'X "^'^ws ilx^v ifj)' eavrov.
He said that all were eager for the war,
iXdcv OTL TrdvTeq wpiiTjVTO cs rui' mjAc/xor.
9. If there is an av with the verb in oratio recta, the con-
struction is retained unchanged in the 5n-clause in oratio
oblicpui : as,
Ife said that he would have done it, tXe^ev on iiroLTjatv av
— kirovnira av, I WOUi
(or
nrjtra
114
ELEMKVTARV CHlCKK PliOSR COMPOSITION.
10. Tlir iicf^ativi; in ojvitio ohlifjua — even iov the inf. (see
§ '58, [ iuid 7, notes)— is usually ov: as,
He thought that the senate inonhl not vote,
<o€To Tiju (SovXijv OV \f/7](l)Lela6(n.
lie said that it was not honourable,
eAetCi' on ov kuAov clt].
EXKRCISE 43.
1. He saifl that luisfortune was the common lot. 2. He
used to say tliat the laws were like a spider's weh : they held
the weak, but were broken Ijy the strong. 3. He used to say
that an old servant was not to be thrown away like an old
shoo when worn out with service. 4. Did he say that tliey
liad broken the laws 1 5. He thought that the force with us
had surrendered. G. He answered that the king was dead.
7. Pindar said that custom was king of all men. 8. He used
to say that life was short, but that misfoi'tune would make
the sliortest life seem long. 9. Don't you thiidv that this law
would have given to the stronger the property of the weaker?
10. He said that he used to give them his gold to keep. 11.
He said that the king was his friend but not for the injury of
the country. 12. He did n<jt wish to cross. Indeed (yap)
that he could not (inf.). 13. He did not think that the ships
would sail out.
§ 44.— ORATTO OTiLTQUA (Continued).
1. Both mood and tense of tlie verb of a subordinate clause
remain unchanged in <»i'atio oblicjua after primary tenses : as,
/ prrdlct that he tcill be refated tvhichever of the iivo
answers he (jires,
—jHtXeyo) on l>iTuT€j)uv av aiTOKfiivqTiit eAey^u^/creTat.
But after secondary t(mses — unless for the sake of vivid-
ouATio obliqt:a.
115
iicss k('j)l, iiiicli;iii,;;'('il - / rnxnri/ /<'i/sr.^ <>/ flw hi'/. <(ii'l <nii/ friiyr
of the siihjiin. in, svhordinaU r/anscn /I'cnitir. ojif. : seroiiihiry
tenses remain uwhdnyed .- as,
He said that he was hrivgimj a man v)hom theij mnxt im/n'ixon,
etTTCV on tti'8/ja ayoi ov ct/)4-ai 8eot (or. r. = arSpa ilyu) or. .8ei).
ITe said that, if he cauf/ht aw/one rnnnhu/ nwai/, he ironJd
treat him as an enemy, ^lir^v on et -tva (j>evyovra Xr'nJ/oLro w?
ToXe/xto) xpr'ia-oLTo (or. r. = d Xr'nf/oixai. .XPW"t^^')-
But : They hoped tlutt the Slceh, whom they had seat for,
ivoidd meet them there, rjk-m^ov tovs litKeXoi)? ov? /xcTeVe/zi/^ai/
TavTTj airauT rj(TaTO<u (secomliuy tense unchanged in suboi-dinate
clause).
J/e said that, if they had come, they iroidd hav^ been kdled,
€(pr] avTols d yjkOov a-rroBavdv dv (or. r. = ei yXOov airiOavw a;')-
2. The participle after verbs of hiowlny follows the same
rules as the inf. in oratio ohlicpia : The tense of oi atio recta is
retained in oratio obliqua and an av witli the verb in oratio
recta is retained with the participle in oratio obliqua : as,
He knew that they had been taken, eyrw avTov<; eaAtuKoras
(or. r. = kakumuTL, they have been taken).
I knew that this woidd happen, eyrwr tovto av yivu^ievov
(or. r. = rovro av yivoiro, this will happen).
3. An imperative becomes in oratio obliqua an inf. ih^pend-
ing on a verb of saying : as,
lie bade them not to be disconraged,
y'l^'Mirev avrok p-i] aOvpCiv (or. r. - pi] aOvfxdTe).
[. For the syntax of the indirect question, sec § 37.
EXKRCISF. 44.
1. He said that ho used to enjoy what he had. 2. They
thought that they would olTcr the sacriiices they had viewed.
3. l)id he say he had remained until the g«Mieral arrived 'I 4.
1 •
116
ELEMENTARY GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION.
I
Thoy answorod tliat lio used to l)l;imo all lio saw. 5. lie says lio
will go where lie is invited. 6. I should like to know how
they found that out. 7. He said that he did not know where
to turn. 8. They perceived that their city had been taken.
9. He used to say that one man was more fortunate than an-
other, but tliat no man was happy. 10. They knew that very
much would have been accomplished by foresight. 11. Do
not think that I am angry with all whom I love. 12. I wish
I had known how matters stood (ex"*)-
§45.— ORATIO OBLTQUA OF CONDITIONAL
SENTENCES.
1. The conditional sentence in oratio obliqua prefers the
inf. to the noun-clause with on. The verb of the apodosis
(§30, 1) is, therefore, usually in t\\^. inf.; the tense of oratio
recta remains unchanged, except that the impf. ind. becomes
pres. inf.; and if there is an av with the verb in oratio recta,
it is retained with the inf. in oratio oblicjua.
2. The verb of the protasis remains unchanged after pri-
mary tenses : as,
(a) if he has anything, he (jives it, d -l c^ei,
StSorai.
if he had any thing, he gave it, et ti ii)(i
(or eo^c)> SiSoj/at (or 8fj£ij/(u).
{h) if he has anything, he will give it, idv n
if he shonhl have anythuig, he would give
It, ci n ^\oi, oioovat av.
(c) //' he had anything (now), lie ivonld give
if, €L Tl CX^' ^'■^"l'"^ OLl/.
if he had had anytJiing, lie would have
give a it, it n tcrx^j SoSvat Jr.
He says that
Compare §30.
! says ]io
i)\V llONS
.V where
I taken,
hail aii-
lat very
11. Do
I wish
AL
fers the
apodosis
»f oratit)
))ecomes
lo recta,
Pter pri-
it, idv TL
))(l(I dire
raid give.
(1(1 Jidve
'
ORATIO OHLIQUA OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 117
?,. Aft(;r a secondary tense, the verb of the protasis, if a
primavn tense of the ind, or any tense of the subjun., becomes
ont. (unless for the sake of vividness kept unchanged) ; if a
secon<la,y tense of the ind., remains unchanged.
Thus : Et Tt Ix.'^i StSwo-iv becomes t(py] et n €xoi 8i8ovai.
Et TL ilx^v (or €o-x€i^) «8i8ov (or e^wKeu) becomes e<^r; ci
Tt etx^v (or eo-^ci') StSomi (or Sowai).
'Eai/ TL exV ^^^^'' becomes e<pr] et n cxot SoWeij/.
El Tt ex<>t StScu'r; av becomes ecfiT] €L TL cxoL StSdvat av.
Et Tt €tx€v cSt'Sou dv becomes 6>r/ €t ti etxe M6vaL dv.
Et n eo-xev c8u>k€v ai/ becomes €>t/ ct ti cVxc Sovmt dv.
Exercise 45.
1. He said that if a man had not connnon sense, no educa-
tion wouhl give it to him. 2. He used to say that if a man
was fond of building, he would so(m ruin himself. 3. If it
had been possible to satisfy the desire for gain, he thought
that I wouhl have satisfied it. 4. Don't you think that if he
were here, all would be well 1 5. He said that they ought to
be punished, if they had reached such a pitch of insolence. 6.
He said that, if we did not need it, it was dear at a penny. 7.
They said tliat if he were wiser, he would be better. 8. O !
that I had lived in accordance with reason. 9. Even if I had
conferred the kindness, I should never have reminded you of
it 10. They knew that all ought to he educated. 11. He
said that if he were general, he would give no quarter. 12
He said that if a snail fell in wich a bad neighbour, it would
move its house away.
g46._NEGATIVES.
1 Tlu^re are two classes of negatives in lireek, oi and its
1 .1 ' ...uHu ••oiiiiM.unds. The rules for the use
compounds, and /v,7/ JUKI lis compwunu .
of oi and f.-n apply respectively to the compounds of each.
118
ELEMKNTAUY GltKEK PUOSI': COMPOSITION.
•_>. Tlio following are the more common negatives : Xot even,
oi';r^e at. (I //r/^e. N.Uh^r . . .nor, ovr€ . , . o.Vc aud iiyrt . . ./xr/rc.
iVo our, av^eU and M^ei'.^. Soirh,-!'' oi'8.i/i.<.v and luj^iafw?:
Ao /.nn-, or8ayLi,o>s and /xr;8a/xos-. ^'ot //'/, oi^tto) and fxi'imo OV
ovhi-mii aud /xr/^eVfr).
3. The gen(Mal ruh; given for the use of ov and /xr; respec-
tively, is as follows :
0'; is used objectively, i.e., in stating a fact ; /xr/ sahjerthdi/,
i.e., in stating a conception. The uses of /xr), however, nuist
he mastered in detail.
-1. The following are tlui chief ust^s (.f ix>j :
(!) M,} is Tiscd with the inf., except in oratio .)l)li(iua after
verbs of sai/iutj and thinkl/Kj : as,
He ivill persuade you not to yo, irturti ae fj.y IkOew.
S«;e§-i;5, 10; §38, 1, note.
But : / confess that I am no orator, ofioXoy^L ovk €^<u fWjTwp.
(2) M7/ is used \n final and conditional clauses und'm relative
clauses >rith a conditio)ial force : as.
He ivent (uray that hr nilyht not see ns, a-i]XB^v a>a [ir] yjfius
l^ui (mx ixy] will thus often express to avoid, escape, refrain
from, etc.).
But if it neither is nor was, what should we have done?
ei 8e ixy'iT mtl fxy'iTe yr, tl xPVV ttoulv ;
1 can, not yire what I have not yot,
a /xt; €;(«), ol^ 8i.Vtt/xat SoCvut.
Do not yo in ivheu he is not at leisure,
,111 dirtXOii^ orav /xr/ crxoAaar/ ( - if he is not. . . ).
(3) Mr/ is used in exhortations : as,
Let Its not pursue wliat is evil, /xr/ SiwK(u/tej/ to KaKOV,
NK(iATlVKa
110
{ot even,
. . . fxrjTe.
Hrjhufior.
jLi'jTrn) or
r/ respoc-
jfctivdijy
er, iiuist
Mil after
ell'.
u relative
a fir] 17/xus
;, refrain
ave done 1
..).
ro KaKOV,
(i) MiJ is used with the deHberatim ^uhjnnctive : as,
Shall we say it or not ?
TTOTepoi' (pu)fX€V rj fir'j ; [§ '2i), 1, (2)].
(5) Mr) is used in indirect questions : as,
jisk him lohether he can or not,
ipov ctT€ SJvarai are jxyj.
(G) j\lr/ is used in prohibifiovs : ii\
Do not steal, [xrj KAeVre or KXe'j/'rys [i^-'^J, 1, (•'^)]-
(7) M>/ is used in ivishes : as,
God forbid ! jxij yivotTo (§ 36).
! that he had not survived, dBt /ii] eVc^to).
(S) Mr; is used with adjectives or participles wlieii they have
a conihtional force : as,
The man n;ho docs not eom))i.it injustice is just,
('.)) "S2cTTe takes ov with the indicative, /u) with tlie inf. : as,
lie was so foolish that he did not a-i.^Ii,
ovroj? ap6r]To<s y]v ojcrre ovK yjf^uvXiTD.
But, He is foolish e7ion.(jh not to wish,
owTCJS dvoTyros «o-riv onrre /xt/ jSovXeadai (§39, 5).
(10) Mt; is used for lest, that, after verbs of farin<j ; fxy] ov
for that. . .not ^§29, G) : as,
/ am afraid that he tvdl cornr, Uh^iKa fxij eXOy.
5. One ne,i,nitive does not cancel aiiother in (ireek as in
Enc^lish Hence indeftnite pronouns and adverbs, in negative
sentences, are expresse.l in Greek by th.ir corresponding
negatives : as,
l)o not do ani/thiii;/ linjiiot'x at an;/ time,
fxij do-e/Ses ixjjSkv Troo/crr/re /XT/7rore.
12U
ELEMENTAIIV C.liKVAi PUOSE COMrOSITION.
ih
;Notk.— Oi ami /xr/, however, when forming a single expres-
sion with the predicate are cancelled by .mot her negativ.^ : as,
For do I fail to see him, oij8c cyw ot'x "P''' ^^''o^''
Let him not therefore escape jmnishuirHf,
/XT] ow fJi-T] SoTit) BiK-qv.
6. For the redundant firj after verbs (jf negative notion, see
§ 30, 3.
7. / sa>/ that. . .not (Lat. nego) is ov (pyfu : as,
He said that ive were not actiruj jiisflij,
OVK €«/)•>; 7//>tUS eVSlKO , TTpaTTUV.
So too : oiK eao), / refuse to allow, dissuade ; jiiid oIk a^^oo,
/ beg not : as,
Ife begs him not to punish, ovk d^iol avTw riiuMpdirOai.
8. Instead of ovr^. .oh^ {neither . .nor), o.Ve . . o.^e {neither
. .nor even) is used where the second alternative is emphatic :
as,
He neither tasted nor handled, out' t'yero-aro oL-ne t/i/^uto.
9. OvU is used for ou and /x,/8e for ;ar/, when one negation is
appended to another : as,
He is not old or yoniuj, ov yipa^v lirrlv ovhl vio^.
Do not be angry or revile, /xry opyt^co-^c /xr/Se Xoioopdre.
Exercise 46.
1. What a person does not need, he should not l)uy. 2.
The man who does not take money, natur.-illy gives better
counsel 3. He wondered that the lish of the sea had no
voice. 4. They knew that the attack' >vould never ho. made.
5. He said that there was nothing like (oiov) liearing {i>f) the
law itself. 0. Do not measure happiness l)y the pleasure it
brings. 7. Do not envy the prospei'ity
f tl
le Lf<>()(
I. S. L«"l
no one s
peak ill of anyone. 9. If there was not freedom from
DOUHIJ; NI<:(iATIVKH.
1:^1
such passions in old ui-f", old ilkmi would be wroti-lifd. 10.
L(;t us do it, if fof nothing else, for jxax-tico. 1 1. i.n no one
outor hero who docs not know monicii-y. I'J. ^lay I ncvci'
have such knowledge ! !■".. Jle went al)road lo a\()i(l injui-ing
the country. 14. iJo not praise what is not honoui'ahlc. 1').
Do iK.t seek to know whether he exists or not. If), f have
not found anvtliing (»ut as vet. 17. Sl.all wo not remain?
i^ 17. -DOITIHJ': NECATFVES.
1. Ov ii>'i with the aor. ,>ul.junct ive (rarely the fuL. ind.) is a
strong iirgntloit: as,
2'his sludl liccer, ncvr happen, roF-o or p",] yaijTai.
2. Ov ixrj with the 2nd person of tlu; fut. ind. (rarely the
aor. subjun. ) is w prohibiliou. : as,
Doiit talk nonsense, ov prj XaArycrets ;
:>. Mij nv has three connnon uses ;
(1) After verbs oifcarimj in the sense of that, .not : as,
1 utisjx'ct that he lo'dl not covie,
virurrreinxi fxr) ovk eXOy (§ 20, () j.
(2) After verbs of negative notion (^ 3!), 3-4; when they
are joined with a negative or a virtual negative : as,
He does not doubt that the gods exist,
OVK aTTUTrel tocs Oeov's py oik en at.
What prevents him from seeha/ ?
TL KwXveL ( = ot'SeV) avTov jxy ov ftX^-rruv ]
(3) For not, after the following phrases: It is a shame,
a]axp6u lirn. It is slran.jr, ^^»"^^' ^>-'- ^^ ''^^ impioas, oix ocn6v
i, nnjnst, nl, ^(.Kawv am. It is impossible, ov 8v./aToV
/t is a strange course not to
E(rrt.
tort.
It
I can not, ov dvi^apai : as.
1:^2
KLKMKNTAKV GIU.KIv PKnSK roMPOSITION.
retreat, t)iivw Ictti filj oik air»x<»i>t'^r. ft is imp ion ti not to Jhjht
for yoKi- t'(,ii„lri/, o'x ''>^>^''>^ «"'^' I'-'l "" l>>ix^<rOat vTrkp t?i<; tto/Vcius.
/ can in.t hr//> pnusliii/ him, ov Ovmimi fxrj ovK inaLVilv avTov
( -T Hill Ull.'ll)l(' IH»t lo. . ).
KXKKCISK 17.
1. lit' (lid not (loiiy thai W. knew all about it. 2. Tlioy
shall iu'v(;i- obtain this request. 3. Nothing pi-eveitts us from
being Nvhat (o-olos) we wish U> l)e. 4. Do not scoff at the
gods. T). T was afi-aid that he would not succeed. 0. Ho
knew that in time of drought all the signs failed. 7. 1 >o not
waste time. S. If this had not prevented us from setting out,
we should bavc arrived long ago. 9. It is unjust not to
restore what has been entrusted to you. 10. Ho thought
that the city had been taken because the citizens did not
exej-t themselves. 1 1. 1 lo said that if liai-s were believed, all
would bo liars. 12. As it is not possible to save the country,
let us die for it. 13. The st-cond ship arrived before the first
and entered the harbour unobserved.
ri
§ 48.~M1H('ELLANFX)ITS.
1. The vocative is almost invariably in prose preceded by
0) : as,
It seems to me, Socrates, that they knoir, e'/xoi 8e ZoKovatv, <L
SojK/KiTcs, ovruL eiSeVut [hoKiuy used personally, i:^ 39, 8).
The w is oiuitted, however, in abrupt or contemptuous
addi'css : as,
Do yon hear, Aeschines ? aKoxkiq, Alax^'V l
2. An adjective in ap])osition witJi a pronoun takes the
ai
•tide : as,
la
I a (
li/in<j, unhappy yirf^ iy^o y Sucr/xopos Ovya-KO),
MlSCELLANEOl'S.
123
to Ji'jiif
Iv avTov
2. Tl.cy
us from
• at the
G. Ho
]K) not
iingout,
not to
tliouglii
(lid nob
ived, all
3ountry,
tho first
;edcd by
coLcrtv, io
tnptuous
akes the
:a).
3. When ttoXj'? or //eyas is used with another adjective, kui
is usually inserted Ix^twecsn th«^ two: as,
}fany clever thiw/s were m'ul, 7roA\a K-at irtxpa tAeycro.
4. Adjectives expressing time, fpiantlfij, ov/eelunj, are often
used predicatively in QvMik for an English adverb : as,
77iey came ott the third d(ti/, l]\Bov TptTatoi.
'The river Jlowed tvlth a fall stream,
6 TToTa/xos Ipiiv-q ac'yas.
Xo one is deliberatelij tvieh'd, ov^eU Ikwu kokos.
r>. He was the first to attack Methi/maa = tt/jwtos Mr/^r/ur/
7rpoo-ej8a\tv.
Methjmna was the first place he attacked = 7r/)o)Tr/ "ShjOvfiin]
TrpocrlfiaXiV.
His first act tvns to attack Methijmna^Tpwnyv ^hiBrpvy
6. The. .the, with comparatives, is o(ra» (% how much)..
ToaovTu* {bi/ so iiiuch) : as,
The more, the better, o(tu) ttXIov, toctoitu) rli/xen/or.
7. Some verbs are followed by either i\w inf. or the parti-
ciple, but with a difference of meaning : as,
/ am ashamed of sayiny,
aiVxvVo/xai Xtyo)./ {i.e., while I am saying).
/ am ashamed to say,
alcrx^'i'nfiaL XiyiLV {i.e., and <lo not).
So too : / knoio I am doiny it, ol8a ravra ttoiwi/.
/ know how io do it, (.TSa raOra trouiv.
8. A sentence in oratio obliciua may begin with the ort-
ckiuse and pass into ace. and inf., or vice versa : as,
124
KLKMRNTAKY <iKKEK VROSE COMPOSITION.
■
Thru said thnt U ffrnned to thnn that the Athenvim were in
fhr H-roHf/, hilt thill Ihvif inxhed to jint it to th<' m/r, iJrrou on
iTil^liU iitv 60K0UV a^iKtlv oiWOrjmloi, fhvXurOaL ?>k .//r;r/,ov cVayuycr.'.
9. A veil) of haoirinij may tuk«! the on-clausc, as well as tlic
parliciple or the inf. (^ H, l-«>) : as,
/ OirjTO'i 0}V.
Know that thou art mortal, urOt Bv7fo% tlvat.
' on 6i'7)t6<: ct.
10. Sai.<l he, in (luoiiii.i,' oratio recta, is Hijn) (Lat. iM<iuit),
and is «,'onerally tlio second or third word in the sentence.
Sdid /, ia t(()i]v of »V ^' *V' • '^'^'
" Hush ! man," said hi; h^yj^cl eV/, <^' uvOfmirt.
EXEUCISE t8.
1. If wo liad retreated, soldiers, what would have prevented
them from advancing whenever they wished? 2. On the
second day we arrived at the rixcr, which was tlien flowin-,'
Willi a full stream. 3. "This was the reason wliy {tovtov
eVcKa) I asked you," said T, "])ecause it did not seem to me
that you cared very much for money." 4. "You knew, my
good sir," I said, "that the lake was frozen." 5. He called
out witli a loud (predicate) voice that the man was dead. G.
The first act of tlie enemy was to burn their ships. 7. The
more a man (rt?) practises, the better he sings. 8. He thought
it was n<jt just or indeed profitable. 9. He said that if he
had never done anyone any wrong, lie should now be happier.
10. I am indignant that they should accuse me of theft. 11.
You know that nothing is more foolliardy than ignorance.
12. If grey hairs made men wise, wisdom would not be so
rare. 13. He sairl he had answered every question that had
been put to him.
tlirov oT(
■ayuyetc.
II fis till!
oil.
inquit),
entenc(\
c.
rovontcd
On tho
1 flowinj^
y^ (toi'xov
m\ to me
new, my
^e ciillerl
lead. G.
7. The
; thought
;hat if he
liappipi*.
loft. 11.
L>norance.
lot be so
that had
OltKKIC IDIOM IN THE USE AND .MKANI.NfJ OF WOIUXS. 125
5^40.— (iKKKK IDIOM IN' TlfK rSK AND MK.ANIXO
OF WollDS.
1, Greek and I'higUsli dilVcr so fiuidaiiu'iitally in (he Un(! of
words tliat none but tlui shiiplest l^iglish can l)e turned word
for word into Greek. An'a(i(!(|uat(! knowledge of syntax and
vocaliulary is soon and easily attained ; ))ut nij knowledge of
syntax or vo(;abulai'y will producre idi<Jin;itic Greek without
thought and observation and the eai-cful study of the (Jreek
writers. No general rules for ae(|uiring tlu^ prineiples of
Greek style are of mueh value ; but the following remarks
may b(! suggestive and of service to the student.
2. English employs metaphor so constantly that many words
and phrases, which are really figurative, may be used without
any consciousness of their figurative character. Thus we say:
They espoused our cause; he is the virtim of wrong; th(^
country had h)ng hem torn by faction. And, although
Greek has metaphors of its own, it is luirdhf cvrr safe to trans-
fdte an En<jlish metaphor litem/ 1 1/ into Creek. In ti-anslating
such expressions into Greek, the language should be strij)pe(l
of all metaphor and made strictly com-rete, i.e., literally appli-
cable to the particidar case in which it is employed. Thus, to
take the above examples :
7Vieij espoused our cause, (Twcfxdxrja-ai' ■tjixiv.
He is the vietim ofiorong, rjSiKrjTai.
The country had hug been torn hy faction,
7] TToXis irakai eVrao-ia^ei'.
3. English idiom, again, shows a marked fondness foi-
abstract and verbal uouns. Thus we say : In my jyresence ; he
f^ave the same advice as before ; he lias a good education; it is
repugnant to tlie dictates of wisdom and justice.
12G
KLRMENTARY OREEK PROSE COMPOSITION.
And in philosopyiical writings sucli a})stract terms frequently
occur also in Greek. But this is not the case in ordinary
narrative and speeches. In translating abstract terms into
Oreek, the language, once more, must be made concrete, i.fi.
applicable to the particular case in which it is employed.
Thus, to take the above examples :
In my presence , ifxov TrapovTo^.
He gave the same advice as before,
Tdi'Ta irapr'ii'ei ainp Koi nporepov.
He has a good education, tv TreTratSeurai.
It is rejmgnant to the dictates of wisdom and justice,
ovTf. crvviTov ovre StKatoi/ eorir.
So too, Poverty is 7io disgrace, to Trevicrdat ovk ala-xpov eanv
(iiifiuitive used to express abstract noun).
Do you know his destination ? ap oluff o-rroi epxerat ; (indirect
interrogative used to express abstract noun).
(For a useful list of such differences of idiom, see Sidgwick's
Introduction to Greek Prose Composition.)
4. As far, therefore, as any general rule can be given, it
will l)e : When an idea is expiessed in English in its most
simple and concrete form, it can vsually he e.qyressed word for
word in Greek,
Exercise 49.
1. They will make more lavish promises than we do. 2. He
has been revolving the plan night and day for three years.
3. If it signified very much to us, they would not have come.
4. The nation had long ago set its heart upon sovereignty.
5. Such were the declarations the letter niade. 6. Some made
one guess, others another. 7. I will proceed to examine the
falsehoods and calunmies you uttered about my political
|uently
rdiiiary
ns into
ete, i.e.
ployed.
ORDER AND CONNECTION.
127
nuiasures. i'>. Perhaps you admit the accurac)- of lh(i.se state-
ments. 9. lie promises etei-nal friendship. 10. He will
suffer punishment for {</en.) his misdei'ds. 11. V>y th(^ reduc-
tion of this vast territoi-y he l)iouoiit his country to the verge
of ruin. 12. l>o you think that they will lay violent hands
upon himi 1.'^. He did not take his departure till after the
revolt. 11. Thi' neglect of these precautions will lead to
disruption.
ustice,
)0V eCTTtV
indirect
Igwick's
^iven, it
its most
vord for
2. He
e years,
^e come,
^reignty.
me made
nine the
political
§50.— ORDKR AND CONNECTIOX.
1. A few sentences committed to memory from Xenophon,
Thucydides, or Demosthenes will do more towards creating a
sense of the order of words in Greek than any number of rules.
2. Words are arranged in their vafnral order (subject, verb,
object)— except so far as this is modified by (1) en'phoinj, (2)
emi^lmsis (emphatic words being put, as in Latin, first or last).
Thus :
T%ssaj)hernes accuses Cyrus to his hrolhfr,
Tto-(ra»/)£>vr/? ^iiafSdWei Kvpov Trpo? Tov doe/\(/)()i'.
Piety is chief of all the virtues,
TTtto-oV Aperm' iiy^fion' lunv y evirifSua (subject last, for
emphasis).
Jt ivas this that he had in viev\
TovTo hi€TrpaTT€To (object first, for emphasis).
3. An interrogative, a conjunction, or a relative stands, as
in English, at the head of its own clause : as.
When they heard this they began to make every endeavour,
ot §€, uJS rjKova-av Tavra, Travra lizoiovv.
4 The following particles never begin a sentence : apa, av.
yap, ye, oc,
8e, 8
»;, /xer, /xT/r,
ovv, re, Toll
w (see §51).
128
ELEMENTARY GREEK I'ROSE COMPOSITION.
I
5. In tlio in'niiigonient of clauses and sontences, two i;ii-
portant cliaractori.stics of Greek style must )je noted :
(1) Instead of co-ordination — which is the principl(> of
arrangement in EngHsh — Ureek prefers snhordiiiatioii.
(2) Instead of placing sentences side by side and leaving
tlio logical connection to be inferred, as is done in English,
Greek by means of connective particles shows the logical con-
nection of every sentence v/ith the one preceding. These two
principles largely determine the distinctive character of Greek
and Latin style. Take, for exani])lt>, Thucydides, B. II., cli.
65,g§l, 2:
ToiaSra 6 Ilepi/cA?}? Aeyoji' tTretpuro Tov<i ^ A hl^rjvaiov^ t'^s re ctt
avTOV opyTys TrapaXveiv kul utto t(7)i/ Trap6vro)V 8eLV(Ji)V OLTrdyeLV Tv/r
yvoifirjV' ol Se byj/JLocria /xlv rots A-oyot? dreTrefy/orro Kal ovre Trpos
TOb'S A.aKeSaLiJA)VL()v^ en eTre/xTroi-' e's t€ t(V TruXe/iov fxaXXov o)p/,t»/i/To,
iBm oe Tots 77 ai^h'j/JLaaw iXv—ovvTO, o fikv Si/yu.o? ort utt' cAacrcrorojr
opfjuofxevos im€f)7]7o koI roiTMV, ot f5e 8vv(it(>1 KuAa Kryjijara Kara 7ijv
^o'jpav oiKoSo/xtats re Kat TroA^jTcXeVrt K(tTa(TKev(U<i airoXwXeKUTeq, ru
8c /xeyiCTTor, TroXijjiov dvT clpy]vy)<i c^^ovres.
*' By these and similar words Pericles endeavoured to ap-
pease the anger of the Atlienians against himself, and to
divert their minds from their terrible situation. In the con-
duct of public affairs they took his advice, and sent no moi'e
embassies to Sparta ; they were again eager to prosecute the
war. Yet in private they felt their suiFerings keenly ; the
common people had been deprived even of the little whicli
they possessed, while the upper class had lost fair estates iji
the country, w-itli all their houses and rich furniture. Worst
of all, instead of enjoying peace, they were now at Wiwy—Jowdt.
In the English the participles become main verbs and the
connectives for the most part disappear.
THE PARTICLES.
129
Til translating English into idiomatic Greek, thorefore, the
reverse process must be gone through : co-ordinate clauses
must be changed into participles or into subordinate clauses,
and the connection of each sentence with the preceding shown
by particles.
Exfucise 50.
By the mildness and justice of liis rule, he won the affection
and respect of his subjects ; by the piety of his life, he deserved
no less the favour of Heaven. Still he was not destined long
to wear the crown ; of that he was soon warned by the gods
in a vision. When asleep one night in his palace, he heard a
loud voice behind him in the darkness, and turning to see
what it meant, he saw, standing with outstretched arm by his
bed, one taller than the sons of men and too terrible to look
upon and Hve. "Prepare for death," said the apparition,
advancing and laying its hand upon the king; "prepare for
death ; the hour of your departure has come." With that it
vanished and the king awoke and knew that his end was near.
Without delay ho sacrificed to the gods and offered the follow-
ing prayer : " Accept, ye gods, this sacrifice. I thank you for
alfthe kindness you have showered upon me. Grant, I beseech
you, that my death may be as happy as my life has been."
§51.— THE PARTICLES.
A list of the more important particles, with the usual force
of each, is appended here ; the meaning in many cases is ex-
pressed in English by the inflection of the voice.
Pai-ticles that can not stand first in the sentence have an
asterisk prefixed.
9 . .
130
ELEMENTARY GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION.
'A6t {always) with tho article and pafticiplo iii.;aus, at avjj
time, for thi time being : as,
The ruler/or the time being offers sacrifice^
6 <x€i K/)(ira)V ^I'ei.
'A/\\((, but (generally after a negative, and stronger than
hi): as,
It is not the rich who are happy, but the good,
ovK ol irXot'o-tot cv8ai/i,ov€9 ilo-tv «A.X' in aya^'ot.
'AAA.' y), except : as,
/ have no money, except a little,
apyvpLov ovK ex"^ ^^^ V l^i-xp'^^ Tt-
"AXXox; re Kat, especially : as,
A cavalry force, especially of barbarians,
ImnKov aXA-ws je Kat (Sdp(3apov.
*"Apa, therefore, or then (expressing surprise) : as,
We have come, then, in vain, /xdrr/i/ apa ly^et? 7/ko/a6v.
"Arc, since, (giving the true reason, while 0.9 gives the
ostensible one) : as,
Since it had been opened, they entered the city,
€(rrj\Oov es rrjv ttoXlv arc avoixOiLcrav.
*Ar, again, on the other hand : as,
I will describe on the other hand, rohat occurred by sea while
all this was going on, Iv J Se Travra TaOra iTrpaTrero, ra Kara
OdXaa-a-av av y(.u6[X€va Siv^yrycro/xtti.
^Av^ts, a second time ; as,
They rvill try to seize the city a second time,
Treipda-ovatv avOi<; KaraXafteiv t'ijv ttoXiv.
THE PARTICLES.
at awj
er than
xcv.
ives
the
sea niliile
*ra^j, for (freciucntly Kat yap) : as,
:7y/« vKirrhrs were short, for it was winter,
Sometimes, in answers, yes : as,
2)o 2/0?* say so ? Yes, iipa Xe'yets ; Acyco ya/».
Often used to introduce a narrative : as,
It was eveninfj. Word came to the . . .
iaTripa fikv yap TjV. y^^ 8' ayyiW^v n, o>, roJ'. . . .
*T€, at least : as, He at least, eVcivo? ye.
Often expressed in English by emphasis : as,
7s he MAD 1 '/ [xaiverai ye ;
"^Tovv, at all events : as,
The same peoplr ahonys inhabited Attica at^ all r rents,
*Ar;, indeed, is used to emphasize the word to which it is
added : as,
]ye are in terrible danger,
Iv 8etKl) 8ri KivSuVo) eo-/i.eV.
T'/ws teas far the greatest battle, «
/^aX^ 7'V "^i^^^ jw-eyurrr? 87/ eyeVcro.
Cyrns thereupon said : '^Tt is fall thue to meet. . .»
Tore 8r/ 6 K^po? Xeyei. wpa 8;/ liaTzavrav • • •
7/e 'Will be here very shortly himself,
eV iSpaxei 8t/ Trapeorai avro? 8r;.
Com^ 7?oii;, aye ^. Listen then, aKove 87).
Hence ^ is used in irony and in stating a, conclusion : as.
Afraid that he will be corrupt ed forsooth by Ak^bmd.s,
8e8c^. Trepl airov M S-</>^«P?: ^^/ ^-" 'AXk.(3Av.
We must therefore give a viihler answer,
Set hrj rpaurepov aTroKplveaOai.
132
ELEMENTARY GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION.
Kai 8>/ is used ill I'cplics iuid /ih' ?)r'/ in disniissing ;i consider-
ation : as,
Look belo?r. I din lookinf/, [i\i\puv kiitid. koI S*/ ySAtVoj.
>So irrnch then for this, rotavra [xlv S»/ -aira (Jjiit. haeo
liactenus).
'^Ay'/TTov, I suppose, of cofirse : as,
We have all done it, J sKjiposp,
airavTe^ 8rj7ruv raiira eVotrytrayuei'.
'''i\y}0€u, forsooth (ironical) : as,
Vindicating the honour of the yod s forsooth,
TOIS B€oX<i BrjSiV TtfXWpOVVTi'i.
"ETTcira, then, following TrpojTov /^ei', is, in, the second ]>lac>' .- as,
In the first pilace he was clever ; in the second j^lnee lie ivas
good, irpujTov fikv o'o^os yv, en-etra Se ctya^ds.
HSr), now (Lat. jam) : as,
He went aivay ^nst noiv, y]8r} airijXOtv.
lie has just gone, ■^Sr] a-n-eXyXvOiv.
He will go away directly, r'jBr} uTreXer^o-erat.
Kai, and, is strengthened by a previous kul or re : as,
J]oth you and I, Kai eyw kol (tv (or eyoj re koI (jv).
Before a single word, Kai is used for emphasis ([.atin
etiam) : as,
You also said it, kol a-v ravra e'Ae^as.
I fear even to say it, okvCj koI Xeyeiv.
If you show you really entertahi the sentiments you profess,
r)VTTf.p KCLi cfipovojv i^aivr] ocrairep Ae'yets.
Even under these circumstances, kul our cos.
This will suffice, apKtcrei kol ravra.
How did he perish ? raJs kol Sto')A€To ;
What is one at all to expect ? ri ^pq kol irpoa-^oKav ;
TIIK PARTICLES.
133
Kal 8t/ Kui, and what is more, and especially (an emphatic
K(LL ) : as,
.1 ,if/ /('hat is more tJiey reached Etjypt,
Koi hi] Kill c\- KlyvKTOv afpimvTo.
KatVot, and yet (Latin atqui, quauiquam) : as,
And yet, ivhat am I saying ? KatVot ri cfirjfiL;
Yuu-rrep, although (always witli a participle) : as,
Although he tvas sick, he did not go away,
KaLirep acrOeviov ovk dTrrjkOcv.
^MeV, in the first place, on the one hand, followed by 8«' {on
the other hand) : as,
You loent a/cay, hut I remained,
(TV jxkv airrjXOe^, iyio 8c t/xcti/a.
*3Mev oiii', nay (to allirni or correct) : as,
Fay, that is just it, avro fxkv ovv tovto iarLv.
*Mr/i/ (a stronger form of fxiv), first and foremost (confirm-
ative, concessive, or adversative) : as,
Why noiv do you learn to shoot ?
TiVo? ix.T]V €V€Ka j-LavOdviTe. to^€.vuv ;
Hence, rt fxy'^v, of course ; Kal fiT^jv or aWa fnijv, yet, and rj /xr^v,
in very truth : as,
Do you see her ? Of course, op^s cKetVr/v ; rt fi-qv ;
rj there are altars, there are also gods. But there are altars.
Therefore, there are gods, d dal /3o>fiot, dal KaC Oan. dAXa ^v
eto-t (iwp.oi, d<r\v apa Oeou
I swear that in very truth I wish, eVo/xvvco ^ /x^ f^ovXiadai.
Nw, now (at the present time. Latin nunc) : as,
/ am just going to do it noiv, vZv Sc /x€XXo> Trotryrrctv.
134
ELKMENTARY GIIEEK PliOSE COMPOSITION.
f '
Nvv 8e is oft on, (tf^ it is : as,
As it is, llirij iii'c it DKitch/or ns all taken tfxjether,
vvv 8e TT^jos (Ti''fJiTravTa<i ry/xas Ikuvol eunv.
"O/xws, nevertheless : as,
ThoiKjh alarmed then met tixjether nevertheless,
ofxhjs K(U Tedoiw/Srjjxei'OL (TweXiyuvTo.
Oirov oi', all bat : as,
2^hey all but perished, octov ov 8u(fiOdprj(Tav.
Ov jxovov (or ovx otl) . . .aAAa Kai, 'not only. . .but also: as,
Not only yon hut all, ov fjt^ovuv av dWa koL Travreq.
Xol o)dy not. . .hat not is ov;^ (or //.r;) ottok. . . aXA' ot'Se. .as,
Tliey tiot only did not repulse tis, bat they di I not even lay
waste the land, ov^ '"''"^s r/ju-a? iTfiiipaxro dAX' ovbk e'S^ovi/ rr/i/ y^v.
*0w (perhaps ^ I6v (oV), this Ixnng so), then, therefore : as,
/ resolved therejm'e to yo, tSo^ev ow fxot Uvai.
Added to pronouns and adverbs, it means ever.- as,
'Oana-ovv, ivhocver. 'OTrrjovv, in whatever way.
OvKovv, tiot therefore, and ovkovv, therefore : as,
Will yon not then leave me alone ? ovkovv [jl eao-cts ;
/ shall have done, therefore, ivhen I have no more strength,
OVKOVV TTCTrat'o-o/xat otuv firj crO^vo}.
IluAu', baek, on the contrary, a second time : as,
They lead him back ayain, dyovcnv avTov iraXtv av.
As it was, on the contrary, he suffered this same treatment
himself, vvv he. irdXtv avros ravTov ( = to avro) tovto tiradev.
Do it ayain f'om the beyiniiing, Troirja-ov TrdXtv i^ dp)(rj<;.
Tldvv, very : as,
Jle was very old, Trdiu 7rptiT(3vTrj<i tjv.
m
TilK PAHTICLES.
135
So too : ixdXa iind fr^«j8pu.
*[l€^), exactly (generally with relatives and relative; ad-
\erbs) : as,
/ abide by t/ie very words 1 swore, iixfiii'o) iXairef) di/xoo-a.
*nor€, once or, with interrogatives, pray : as,
Once upon a time there Heed a man, Ijv yap innf. avi]^ n?.
Who, pray 1 tU itotc ;
*Toi, / tell you : as,
/ have been listeniny to you, I assure you, for a lony thw,
TTtikaL Tot uKpow/xat o-oj!'.
^Toivvv, then (resumptive) : as,
Then either shorv yourselves better men than ive are or remain
here, rj roivvv rjfxdv KpciVrous ycVco-^e rj /xeVcrc avTov.
'fis, as, hoin (distinguish from ws, thus): as,
Jnst as I am, ovto)<s o)s tx^.
As they say, ws Xc'youo-iv.
As far as ivas possible, m eV tCjv SwaTwi/.
For a Spartan, he was not without skill in speakiwj,
7)v Se ovSe dSwaro?, ws Aa/<e8at/xovios, ilyrdv.
If you have come as friends, ciTrep a>? (/^t'Aoi Tr^j(Kr7/KCTc.
Bow polite ! 0)5 ao-Tctov.
"ilaiTip is often \ised for ws : as,
7 am afraid lest like the lotus eaters we may for<jet our homes,
SiBotKaM '^o-'^^P «^ AtuTO^ayot T^v o'tKco»' e'7rtXa6o^/x€(9a.
yl.s- rt ?;w/M <6\)M/f^ say if he were accused,
wo-TTcp av d Ti5 atTiwTO (/)T^(reicv av {av repeated).
"Uim, so (connective) : as,
So the matter prospered,
<i(rrc TO ipyov irpovx^priacu ( = went forward).
13G
ELEMENTAUY (JUEEK PUOSK COMPOSITION.
Exercise 51.
1. And yet I liave been many years alieady in the trade.
2. How liard it is to maintain even one man in idleness ! 'A.
A little after, you came youiself. 4. They will Ix'.ir old a^c?
very easily. 5. Do you see, tlien, how many (jf us thei-e are i
6. We found his brothers there and, what is more, Tluvisy-
machus. 7. This custom is observed not only .-imong Greeks
but among barbarians. 8. They not only could not see the
houses but they could not even see the land. 9. These men
will praise nothing except wealth. 10. From this we can see
that we have made a mistake. 11. jVlany mistakes were
made as was to be expected (w^) in a largo city. 12. If they
really are doing any thing of the kind. 13. I do not value it
at a straw. 14. It was unjust to seize this empire, but it is
dangerous to let it go. 15. The plague is the one and only
thing that has exceeded our anticipations. IG. I will bring
you in, as if forsooth you were a spectator. 17. You will
know, I suppose, that you are not in Greece. 18. For, as
(oLTe) he was a boy, he was delighted. 19. Although they
knew that they had been deceived, they consented. 20. So
when they saw both men and horses advancing, they immedi-
ately departed.
Exercise 52.
One day the king's shepherds were in the fields with their
flocks, when a violent storm arose and, with a loud crash lik^
(ai^ of) thunder, the earth yawned and a huge chasm a})peared
beneath their feet. The rest fled in dismay, but Gyges boldly
descended into the chasm, where he saw a brazen horse with
{€)(wv) doors in its side. When the doors were opened, he saw
the body of a dead man with a gold ring upon his finger.
This ring Gyges immediately drew off and, putting it on him-
self, re-ascended to the light. Not long after, he h^ippened to
V' i
KXEKriSKS.
137
e tr}id<\
ess ! 'A.
old age
ere arc t
Tlu'asy-
Grecks
SCO the
3.se men
can see
BS w(!re
If they
vahie it
;)ut it is
nd only
11 bring
^ou will
For, as
?h they
20. So
immedi-
bh their
ash liko
ppeared
s boldly
so with
, he saw
! finger,
on hiin-
>ened to
be pres('nt at a shepherds' gathering and the ring was upon
his hand. And happening to turn the })e/el of the ring to tlu;
])alin of his hand, lu^ instantly became invisible, though able
hiinsclf to see all that was going on. Ibit when he turned the
ring back to its place, h<' instantly became visible again.
Struck with the; wonderful virtue of tlu^ ring, lie inunediately
i-epaired to the pabice, and easily gaining admission by its
means to th(i royal bedciiamb(M-, killed the king and took
possession of the throne.
EXEUCIHE 53.
In the camp Ijefore Numantia the wisdom and courage of
Tiberius were all the more conspicuous because of the uniitness
of the Roman connnander. The l)esieged Numantines had
even ventured to come out and engage the besiegers before the
walls of the town ; and in the battle that ensued, if not vic-
torious, they so disheartened the Iloman general that he <le-
cided to raise the siege. Orders were sent round to the
s(^ldiers to hold themselves in readiness to evacuate the camp
during the night. He hoped in this way to withdraw unob-
served l)y the inhabitants of the place. But the enemy were
on the watch and made a spirited attack upon the retreating
army, which they quickly surrounded and forced into an un-
favimrable position from which thei-e was no escape. Despair-
ing of safety, the general sent a her. Id to the Numantines to
ask for a truce. They replied that they had no confidence
in any of the Romans except Tiberius ; if the general wanted
peace, he must send him to them. Accordingly Tiberius was
sent to the enemy's camp and partly by persuasion, partly by
concession, obtained peace for his countrymen and saved an
army of twenty thousand men.
1 ;',H
KI.KMKNTAI.'V (iUKKK I'KOSi: ("OM F'OSITION.
»r.
I
KXEKCISK 51.
At, sutisrt tli(^ Median liors(> r(i(i(> into camp witli tlioir
|)ris(iiHMs and hallt^d licfoi'i; tli<i tent of ('yi'us. Aft(U' askin<^
( l><ii'f.) it' all w(n'(5 satV', he at ontM? hcifaii (<> (|nosti(»ii tluMn as
to tli(? rosulfc of tlicii" exjK'dition and listened with {\w <:fft'atesb
int(!i-est to their narrativij. When they liad told him all thoy
\vishe<l to 1,(^11, he demand(!d if tho eonntiy tlirouj,'h which thoy
lia<l pMssed was po|)nlons of not. They replied that their ride
had taken them far aci-oss the country and tluit it was all
densely })opulat(Ml and abounded in slu'ej) and (»xen and corn
and wint;. "Two considerations, then," said lie, '"demand our
attenti<»n. A\'e liaxc to consider, fii'st, the means hy which we
can kee^) control of the country we have concjuered ; and,
secondly, tlu? means hy which wo can insures its inhabitants
remaining in it. A populous country is a most valuable con-
(juest ; l)ut a country (U^titute of |io])ulation is destitute of
exei'vthing that is valual)lo. Thes(i prisoners, therefore," he
continued, " must be released. For on the one hand when
the p(>o})l(! of the country see their fri(>nds returning homo in
safety, they will be more; willing to i-emain in the place and
accept p(?ace at our hands ; and, again, as h)ng as we kecsp
control of the country, all the })eople in it are virtually our
prisoner's. "
lOxKHClSK 55.
The Persian of to-day is innneasurably inferior to the
Persian >)f the time of Cyrus. If Cyrus took an oath, he kept
it; if he gave a pledge, he redtiemed it; but the present king
has violated the most sacred pledges and broken the most
solemn oaths. Cyrus was consid(!i'ed th(^ father of his peo{)le,
but the present king is their tyrant and oppressor. In conse-
<|!!('n('(' (sf sue]' iuipiety and ij! jiiKticf o!) the part oi ((/n).)ihf^\v
ruler, the people at large have also become impious and
KXKUC1SE8.
139
(li (luMr
[• asking
tluun as
•jffeatest
all thoy
ich they
ti(Mr ride
was all
111(1 corn
land our
'liich wo
d ; and,
a])itants
J)]o con-
itute of
'ore," ho
1(1 wlien
home in
lace and
we keep
ally our
to the
he kept
3nt king
;he most
s people,
n conse-
n.) their
ous and
unjust; for a nation will he neither Ix'ttor nor worse; than its
nil(!rH. In the time of Cyrus tln^y were taught from hoyhood
to speak the truth and practise justice ; now tliey tell lies and
pra(.'tise injustice. They have also degenerated in many other
r(?spect8 from tlie character of their forefathers. They used to
drink water, and that too, sparingly ; now they are often
drunk with wine. One uwa\ a day ({/''n.) used to suHice ;
now they often sit at a ff^ast from morning till midnight.
Once they could bear with e(jual fortitude the heat of summer
and the cold of winter ; now they re(iuire hats and glovers in
winter and artiiicial shade in summer. Once they weie
ai-dently devoted to the chase ; now they hate those who love
hunting as showing superior virtue. I>y their courage and
skill in war they once reduced a great part ((f Asia under
their dominion ; but now an enemy can pass through their
territories with greater ease and greater security than a friend.
Exercise 50.
And, Sir, if any memlxn- of this house is of the opinion that
such a course involves trouble, labour, and expense, he is not
far wrong in his opinion. It certainly does. I'.ut if we retlect
that disaster will inevitably overtake us unless we show our-
selves rePA^y and willing to assume the resp(msibilities which our
empire lays upon us, we shall see that a ready and willing per-
formance of duty is, after all, our only expedient course. God
knows! it would be an everlasting disgrace to this country
and every way unworthy of the nation's glorious past, to hand
over and betray to a grasping despot those victims of aggres-
sion and wrong.
I
VOCABULARY
I
F
con
siai
aoc
a (
al)
ab
ab
al)
al
al
al
ac
a(
ac
ac
ac
a(
a(
a
a
n
a
a
VOCABULARY.
C
D
For numerals, see Oranunar; cnmrai't verbs are ^^iveii uiicontracted, and must be
contracted; «/^^^verb; ^c. transitive ; //(//■.^intransitive; «(/r. -^acherl) ; xb. = snU-
stantive; »i. ^masculine ; /.-feminine; u. ^-neuter; r/. :-.<,'enitive ; tZ. -^dative ; a. =
accusative.
A.
a or an, ~i(;.
able, (^uvaTuc.
abound in, ueoTdcj nfii (g. ).
about, rcepi, atupi ; with numerals,
fi<i7uara.
above, inrtp (g.).
abroad, go, arco6iiiiko.
abstain from, a-irtx'JiMai (g.)-
abuse, loidopia.
accept, ()fxofJ.at.
accomplish, see do.
accord, of one's own a., arror.
accordance, in a. with, ~p6r (a.).
according to, Kara (a.), 7r/»»; (a.).
accordingly, ovv.
account, on a. of, '5/d (a.) ; of no
a., TTtpl olxSn'ur.
accuracy of this statement - this to
be rightly said,
accuse, alridouai.
accustom, tlH^u.
ac(iuire, KvdunuL.
across, '^/(i (g. ).
act, Ttpdrn.) ; (sb. ) -pnyiia.
action, tp]i>v.
addition, in a. to, ~p(')c (d.).
[
a(hlress, /iyw.
admire, Oavjid^i,),
admission, gain, i:'tGij>xou(u.
admit, //yfofiat,
adorn, Knnitko.
advance, TTiuhial I'l-).
advantage, dyiHui'. To the ad-
vantage of, rrpui: (g.).
advantageous, (ou)^ / ///"f.
advice, give, 7:ap(uvtu).
Aegean, klyalo^.
affair, -payiia.
all'airs here, ra hth'u)t\
affection, win, (/.i/^o/m/ (be loved),
ailidavit, make, (Uouvvui.
afraid, (jJOJSuiutvog. Am a., see
fear.
after, pni (a.) ; Pt/ (g.) [l«. .')!, (i)l,
f-Tc/, varepov ; after all, »/«/, '^V ;
a little a., o/^'}'.' ''f^-/""'-
again, aWn:, Trd'/ir, fV.
against, I'nj (a.), /-' (a), k"'u (g.),
7Tp6(; (a.).
ago, §22, G.
aid, f.)6MiJ.
ail, vnnio).
Alexander, ' .\/ f:;ai''V"('-
1 4:i I
£
r
G.
K
I
J
K
I.
M
N.
0.
?.
a.
r
y
144
VOCAHULARV.
alive, 1)0, s'i'''.
all, ~ar. AH those who, navTi-r
ana/,
allege, oarrso).
ally, o'r/i/iaxo(;.
alone, /tuvor.
along, napd (a.).
already, ^/f5//.
also, K(il, a'/-?.()g.
although, lauTTEp ; § 3i), G.
always, ad.
am, ylfii, yiyvo/j.(u.
ambassadors, nptafSeig.
ambitious, (t>L7i6Tti.iog:
among, h (d.), ^"^Z^" (d.).
amusement, 7ra»5/«,
ancestor, Trpoynvw;,
anchor, weigh, aipi>K
ancient, ■Ka'kaiug,
ancients, the, ol Tralat.
and, Kcii, re, dk.
and that too, koL ravra.
and yet, Kamn.
anger, opyy.
angry with, be, bpyi^uaat (d. ), f5i'
«/'}//C ^-.Yf"' (a.).
animal, Btjpiov.
announce, ayytHw.
another, (i/znc.
answer, uTroKpivouni.
anticipation, see hojie.
any, anyone, rig.
anything, ri, or - everything,
apparition, (pda^un, drug.
appear, (paivojuai.
ip' \t, Tciaad).
upi ch, jrpoax^'pt'O),
aid' ,Jy, use superl.
Argos, A/;j'()^- (n. ) ; oi A., Wpyniig.
arise, yiyvo/ia/.
arm, Un/nv, ni/xvg, r(,ir (jn,),
army, fjrpnTcv/ui, (i.rnr.
around, (ipoi, ~tpi.
arrest, nvAht/ijVivo).
arrive, (K'piKvhijint.
arrive before, (fi^avu (p. lUD, 7).
art, rfxvr).
artificial, /nfir/xavTj/nevog.
artist, rf^i'i-vr/yf.
as, .'•.Tt/, (og, (',)GTTEp, an! (after .s«??;r);
f'i' (/' ; Kara (a.) (^according to) ;
as follows, Td/aih ; as yet, tn ;
as you enter, § 16, 11.
as to, TTty)/ (g. ).
ashamed, be, alnxvi'ouai.
Asia, Acrm.
ask for, alrfu).
ask ((piestion), tpurdo).
asleep, when a., Koifir/dtlg.
assembly, innArjaia.
assent, nvvatvto).
assert, V"//"') 'pdoKio.
assist, j3()//6h.> (d. ).
associate with, uiu/.ko (d. ).
Astyages, ' Aarvdytig.
at, h>, Trapd (d.), ettI (d. ).
at a distance, (hd (g. ).
at full speed, hard updror.
at hands of, r~d (g. ), -(idr (g. ).
at price of, use gen., p. 33, 3.
at once, crii'vg.
Athenian, 'AO>/vaing.
Athens, Wityvai, uv ; of Athens,
' AOr/ralvg.
attack, make an attack, rcpoa-t-ru)
(d.), (sb.) la.h'/j/.
attempt, ~t:Lpau'
Attica, ^ AttikI/.
autochthonous, iwrdxOuv.
avoid, (pf-hyu), 'iva pi/, p. 118, 4^ (2).
awake, t:ytlpu.
VOCABULARY,
145
•).
U!), 7
ter .sa??!r);
nling to) ;
yet, tn ;
«, 3.
f Athens,
~i)i)n~i~rt,)
118, 4. (2).
B.
li;ibyl(»n, ■Ba/^i'/U'jv, wwif.
liad, KuKur,
back, TTfiA/v, «/'.
banished, be, tKniTTu.
bank, r/jd7reC«-
})arbarian, ftdpl^npoc.
base, /coKOf.
bathe, Aohouni.
l)attle, /iiaxV-
be, «///, yiyvo/iai, tx^ (with adv ) ;
be upon, sTreifu (d.).
beam, (hKuc; (f.).
bear, ^epw.
beautiful, Kci/f5f.
because, or«.
because of, (lia (a.), "H/xi (a.),
ei^fKa (g. )•
become, yiyvojuu.
betl, /l^VfoC', '>t'f-
bed-chamber, Oa?Mfj.og.
before, Trpo (g.), i-7r/' (g.). or see
initil.
beg, «/rfw, f5/o/za/ (g.).
l)egin, §24, 5.
beginning, be the, ''Piw (g. ).
behind, o-iaeev (g. ).
liehold, /3At-7rw, o/'""-
believe, niaTi-vu, vo^ii^o).
l)elong to, cl/d-^-geu.
bend (of a bow), rdvu.
beneath, viro (g. ).
beseech, Urr/vu (by, Tr/jor+gen.),
or use 6//Ta(pra!/).
beside, napd.
l)esides, Trpo(;(d.)-
besiege, irohnpKtL).
best, see good.
better, see <jood.
betray, tt pmSU^(jfii.
10
l)etwecn, /lErn^i' (g.).
beyond, I'-ip (a.) ; b. his strength,
l<Trt:() avTdv,
liezel, a(l)EvMvr/.
bind, (5f'(j.
bite, ddnvu.
blame, alndofiiu ; "to blame,"
airing.
blessing, hyaOov.
blind, Tv<p7Mg.
l)lockade, iroliopKiio.
bloom, dvOeu, 3d?J.u.
board, go on, dvafiaivu).
boast, avx£i->.
body, (TM/za, arog.
bold, dviSpdog.
born, be, ylyvofiai.
both, a,u^w, dfiijtoTFpog ; both . . and,
ATu' (rt). ./cat.
bow, TO^OV.
boy, TraZc, ^roaJof.
boyhood, from, eh Trau^uv.
Brasidas, Bpacu^ag.
brave, avdpdog.
bravely, dv6p£io)g.
l)razen, ;va'^'<f"f.
break, <^iappyyvv/u (intr. in mid. ),
7raf)o/?aiW (violate) ; breakdown,
breast-plate, dupa^, amg (m. ).
bred, be, rptcpo/KU.
brevity, ni fSpaxrrfpa.
brick, irXivdog (f.).
bridge, ytx^vpa.
bring, ^f'pw ; bring false ( i.-'.rges
against, i^LCiM/M,) (a.); ^ in,
tt(Ta;w; b. to ruin, say ruin;
b. to terms, dyu tg ah/xfiamv.
broken, be, eaya.
bronze, ;Vii/./v£f)C-,
brother, ii(it?i(p6g.
c
£
F
G.
H.
r
J
K
I.
M
N.
0.
?
(a.
u,
V
K.
y
146
VOC ABU LAKY.
l>uil(l, (^yiK,).
lnudon.soiiie, /ii>x/^f/P''"^'
I>urii, i(ai(,).
l)iit, <'i/h'i,, fU'.
I
Ituy, (orio/iiii.
])y, i'~<J ig-), K'i-~<t (ii. ) with minie-
rala, f~/ (g. ) with pronouns, j).
53, (e).
C.
calamity, trt'dhq, nvq.
call, naAt.u) ; call in, aaKnlto ; call
out, EKKUAtli).
calumnies you uttered, a 6dp(iAAf:g.
camp, arpaTOTTEdov.
can, iVvvatmi.
capable of commanding, upxixor
(g. ).
capture, KaTa^M/nlUdvu.
care, take, (ppovriCo) ; care much
for, Titpl TTo^TiOv noitiujuu, ]>. 58,
(d).
carelessness, cifieTieia.
carry, (ptpto.
carry away from, cittoko/liIl^u) ; carry
on war with, Tro/.tido) (d. ),
case, in extreme cases, trrl tuv
~apa()u^(jv. In which c, §29, 3.
catalogue, KaTd?.oyog.
cause, alriov, (vb.) irap^x^-
cavalry, en ImrEig.
cease, rrat'O/iai.
Cecrops, K/Ayjoi/'.
cement, (infiaiuu).
centre, idaoq.
certainly, it c. does, rruvv /utv orr.
certainly not, iiKiara yt.
chain, d/.vGit], k.xj.
character, Tpoirog.
chariot, a/ui^d.
chasm, ,v<IfT'/(f, arog.
cheaply, /iiKpav.
child, iT(i,i<h<)i>,
chimera, x'l'-"'P^-
choose, atpto/KU.
cistern, (p()in/), arog,
citadel, ni<f)67Tn?dg,
citizen, 'n-o?JT//g.
city, •rro/'jf, ecog.
Cleon, K/kov, owng.
cloak, ;);/trtn'a.
coast, alyiaAog,
coast along, TcapmT7.fu.
cold, il>i'XI"k' (adj. ), i'i'Xog, ovg (sb. ).
collectively, nrfiTruvTeg.
colony, a-niKia.
column, arltpag, ovc.
come, Epxo/Mii, tlui^ § 24, 3 ; c. in,
dat/iu ; c. on, yiyvoimi ; c. out,
t^tpxopai.
command, Kpa-tu (g.).
commander, arpdrr/yog.
commit, see iiiipiefy.
common, Kmvog.
common-sense, (ppovijoic.
commonwealth, koivuv,
company, ?.«A'''?'
compared with, to, Trapd (a.)-
compel, avayiM^u.
compose history of, avyypd(l)u.
conceal from, dnoixp'vKTu, § 17, 5.
c(mcern, E'tul irpug (a.),
ccmcerns, as far as, § 39, 9.
concerned, § 39, 9.
concession, by, use nvyxi-Jp^'^-
condemn, KnraytyvMaia.), § 15, (S).
condition, on, £7r«(d. ) ; §39, (5.
confer, favour, kindness, ti zuiiui
(a.),
confess, ufwh)yttJ.
conlidence, have, iriarEvu {d.).
VOCAHULAUY.
147
, ow; (sl>. ).
3 ; c. in,
; c. out,
(a.).
§ 17, r,.
1).
I 1"), (S).
39, G.
J ft) ~unu)
(a.).
Conon, Kw(.)i'.
conquer, I'^/cdw.
conquest, omit.
consent, avvaivh).
consequence, in c. of, ttixxj {a.).
consider, aaoTrk.), TTinenfiat, ini/ii^c).
consideration, omit.
conspicuous, be, (kaMfiTcu.
contest, a>'wv, uuug (m.).
continue, 9?//^/.
control of, keep, Kurfx'^)-
corn, aiTor.
correspond with, av/LKpiovfu (d. ).
council, Povli].
counsel, [hv/.f:viua ; give c, l^ov-
'At'vco (better c, (itlru,)).
count as, TidE/j.ai napd (a.), p. 50,
(3) (a).
coun.iv.ss, dvapidfiTjTog.
country, Tro/af, Trarimj, x^^)"--
countryman, TToAhin:.
courage, av6pda.
course, omit,
crash, ihvTzoq.
crews and all, p. 23, (4).
cross, (hajSdi'o), irtiHuoouni.
crowd, ox^og.
cruel, dypiog, ufiug.
cruise along, irapaKMu.
cry, ftodu.
custom, vofior.
cut off, d-D-i It I'lJ.
Cyrus, Kufxitj.
D.
daily, kuO' ijfiqmu.
danger, Kifih'vog.
dangerous, tTviKli'iSri'iH-.
dare, Tolfidu.
daric, (^apF.iKog.
Darius, Aaptlog.
darkness, nhdmr, di'.
(lauglitcr, ()i))driip.
day, Ijiilpd. In my day, '-' f'/""'-
In days of, /-/ (g. )• <'"^ "li^y'
TTor/. Win (gain) the day, ;'//>('w.
day-break, at, niia I'unpu.
dead, vtKpui, TnlhniKurnr ; dead man,
muipdg ; be dead, TtHD/jKh'ui.
dear, //dig, ttoImw.
death, ddvarog.
deceive, l-^inrardo).
declaration, use dif/du) (declare),
declare, '/>///«', dij7du).
defeat, vu<di,), (sb. ) tj-th.
defend oneself, dpi'vofiat.
de<ienerated, have d. from the
character of, use ,tf '/"■"' ' V"-
delay, dt'^x^'' ; without delay, ti'U'vr.
deliberate, ftovAtvojidi .
delight, Ttp-i.) ; d. in, iidonai.
delighted, be (with), lidmuu.
deliver, Tvdpadldufu.
Delos, M,?iog.
demand, ipiordu, irwHdro/mi.
demand attention, use tm/uAiofjai
(take care of).
Demosthenes , \)/,una6f v?jg.
densely, v-to noVj.iov.
deny, oh 0?///<, d-apvtopai.
depart, diztpxopai, TroptroiKii.
departure, take, =- depart.
deposit, Ka-ariBr/f.
<leprive of, uTToaupfo).
derived, be, ylymiiai.
descend, mra[ia'n'u).
descent, by, yn'ur.
desert, TTpodldunn.
deserve, d^iog tupi ; deserved the
favour of, d^iog v'' dpioKUv (d.).
(losire, tTTiBi'iiid.
despair of, dnuytyvuaiiu.
c
D
£
F
G.
H.
I
J
K
I
M
N.
0.
?.
a.
K
S.
T
u
V
X.
y
z.
148
VOCAnULARY.
■> ?1
desperate, h TrovrvnTj/ihni.
<le8)»ise, K<iT(ii;>jiiiV)(,> (g. ).
despondent, be, allruu,),
destined, d/iniyn ror.
destitute, fi»//if)i (g. ).
destroy, Ka-aAvu, t^uiipHtupo).
determine, (havofniiai.
devoted to the chase, (pi'/.6er/i)o^.
die, cnroOvt/aKO).
different, in d. places, a/'/otkv.
difficult, ;i'a?e7rof.
disappoint, atjxiTih.),
tisaster, rrdOog, to nTTorvxeh'.
tfisband, (^la/J'u.
discretion, to aux^povtlv.
dishearten, KaTmr/Jjaau.
dismantle, neptnipfiJ.
dismay, in, use <hi6o).
dismiss, (haTTffi7:'j.
disperse, (hMco.
disposed, be, <hdKeifiai.
disruption, lead to d., Vie h<j)iGT7/ui
(cause to revolt),
distance, at a, § 19, 1 , (I), (c).
distant, be, aTr/vrw.
distinction, *5d^a.
distinguish, Kplvu.
disturb, TupnTTu, Kivku.
divine, Bfiog.
do, TTpaTTio, TTo/f w ; do wrong
(harm), ai^mtu.
doctor, laTpoQ.
dominion, bring under, v-oaTphbo-
fUU.
door, Ovpn.
down from, nard (g.).
drachma, (^paxM-
draw oflF, 'Kepiaipku.
draw up, Taaco), avyypn^i'i (of laws).
dreadful, i^tivoq.
drink, /Wt'6'//, (vb. ) irivu.
drive out, tit/nivu.
(IroiiLjht, iil'\iiiii, Mr,
drunk, be, /teOn.) (with, I'lTid).
fluiiiig, hdTi'i (a. )•
duty, 't A'f^/tTci (\h)vr(i.
each, fKncTToc.
eager, TzpoOvtwc^. lie e. to, rrpoflv-
/u.)r + inf.
ear, ore, (,)t6(; (n. ).
earth, }?'/.
ease, with, pm^lug.
easily, pui^lug.
east, «.'C, 0) (f.).
easy, pi/<^i(>g.
eat, taSiio.
educate, TTanhvo).
education, -nithia, fuWrfoig.
effect, ()i(i-p(iTTij.
Elateia, 'E/araa.
else, a/'fA)c,.
emanate, yiyvnfjxu.
empire, dpxV-
enact, § 27, 1.
encamp, aTpdrnTTtchTouai.
end, e. was near, say : now about
to die.
ended, be, tfJevtou, Tt:Ato(uu.
enemy, TroTiiiiioi, o)v.
engage, /inxo/mi (d.).
enjoy, aTro/arw (g. ).
enough, o'lTug . . .uote (inf.).
ensue, yiyvuuaL.
ensure their remaining, say : how
they shall remain,
enter, t'latpxo/icu, nation,
entrust, KaT(iTith//u,
envoys, seo amlxissadors,
envy, (pOovog, (vb. ) (jiOoriD (d. ).
VOGABULAHY.
149
Ephcsus, 'E(^fm>f.
erect, 'inry/ii.
I'h-etria, 'V^inTfua.
«.:rr, ('i/i(if)T<n'(j.
escape, (nro^ivyi-^ ; e. notice, hivO-
(h(.) ; e. piuiishment, say : that
lie might not be punished.
esteem higlily, Trrin tto/'/mv -onnuai.
eternal friendship, say : to he a
friend always.
Euhoea, YA'^ma.
evacuate, h'n'nru),
even, kcu ; e. if, § 35, 6 ; e. though,
Kai~iip.
evening, ^a-i-fm.
everlasting disgrace, use superl. of
(unxpor.
every, indorog, Tzdr.
everything, 'rrarra.
every way, <^'/ (with superl.).
evil, KdKuv.
examine, e^fTiK<<>
exceed, Kjninni.iv t'tiii.
except, 77///" (g.).
excess, in, «}'"'•
excessive, (iyui:
exclude, dpyco.
exert oneself, Sidrtivouai.
exhort, T«/;a/vtw (d.).
exile, (pvyy, (wydi:, (Uhi;.
exist, f!/v'.
expectation, t?nir.
expedient, aviioqun'.
expedition, t::ii(\(ir (f. ).
expense, (5«-<iiv/.
experience, have no experience,
u-iipur nil I (g.).
exiiuisitely, use superl.
extend ow.v, i~ixu.
extreme, see case.
eye, o(j)0u?.(i6g.
F.
face, TTpoaomov.
fail, aiKipTClVUK
fall, TT/Vrw, (of rain) yi}vn/ini.
fall in with, trrv} v^iiw (d.).
full on, TTixia-i-Tu) (d.).
false, ij'rr^r/r,
falsehoods you uttered, a hjiFvciov.
famous, TTari'.
far, /Kiapdv.
fast, Tdxv.
father, nnTt/p, rpog.
fault, see find.
favour, see confer.
fear, (kU^io, (^lol-ihuni.
feast, (5f7Ti'/w ; at the f., use vb.
fellow-labourer, aimpyog.
fertile, Ttlovaioc-.
few, u'/.iyoi.
held, n-jpor, /inxv. In the field,
H- rnhj ftdxfiK:.
li^lit, pcixoiint (with, d.).
tind, ripioiM, h(ir<iAnii(idvco.
find fault, t-LTijiiu.) (d.).
find out, t-^evpiGKu).
linger, (ViKTv?ing.
fire, TTiy), dg (n.).
firm, (itt^aiaq.
first, 7:p(,)Tov jih. See p. 10, 3.
first, at, iipuTov.
fish, iAO'?. ^"?-
fix on, rrpoaexi-) (d.).
flee, </»?(>(.'. y- from, dmmvyu.
F. for refuge, mruiptr)
fleet, vavrmiv, vf/Eg.
fling away, airoppiirTU).
flock, -pufiaTa, uv.
flog, paariydo).
flmrish, rU'Ot'w.
flow, pew.
w.
£
r
G.
H.
I
J
K
I
M
0.
?.
a.
u
V
X.
y
z.
150
VOCAUULARY.
I '>!
flower, nr^Jar, unr.
ily, (jttr-'^i.,.
follow, i-Diiitt (d.) Afl follows
(following), Tiiii'tih,
foUil of hiiiMing, (!>/'/ o/Ktuh'i/ior,
fool, jiutpnc,
fool-li;iitly, Tn^/ir/i)ar.
foolish, /Uiipt'ir.
loot, TTorr, 7rn6('ir [m ) ; haiiil and
f., ace. pi.
for, }'</*, 'inha (for the sake of) ;
p. 33, (r>), i-l (<l,, with a vii'w
to), ('^n; (on account of), V7rt:f) (in
behalf of), ~(/)' (about) ; of time,
p. 43, 9.
for all time, ff aei.
f«jrbicl, (irraynprlo).
force, (sb. ) use article, (vb )
forefather, npoynvog.
foremost of all, h' rohj -jx'.nDq.
foresight, rrfxlrotn.
forget, 't~i'/iiv(h'ivnjmt.
forgive, nvyyiyvioaKO).
form, Trf-i/}n.
former, ^Htirog, i) ftiv.
former times (days), of, ~p'n', TTi'ihu.
forsooth, (h'/Htv, iSij.
fortify, rn \iCii>.
fortitude, with equal, u/toiwg.
fortunate, eiri'xVi^,
fortune, good, tvT\<xi(t.
four at a time, (wa Tfrrnfuir.
four others, with, -hi-^rrng (I'vror.
free, De'vflfpnc,
freef^om, tv.nfhpia {from, g.).
freeze, p. 74, 2.
friend, (pi'/nr ; be f. with, oi'/ar
tlvilL (g.).
friendship ipi'/Mi.
frighten, (pojiiu).
fr(»m, anil, ik (g. ) ; hv. f., nnfi/u.
front, in f. of, ~/io (g. ).
fugitive, f/'i';cjr, arfor.
full, at full speed, nrh hpurar ;
with full stream, 7ri)?ig.
furlong, (JTcichov (pi., a/),
furnish, ~(if>y;^(,).
G.
gain, KtpiW, ovr, (vb. ) KtpcSnivo).
gain day, see daij.
garrison, (;>p(iipt(w.
gate, Tzi'/j/,
gather, av/Myu.
gathering, n'f'/'/o) or.
general, nrpciTZ/yor ; he g. , nrpnTrj^tu),
gentle, rrpuotj, TTpar/ii., Trpaov,
geometry, yK,)/ttrpl(i.
get, '/(ii'i-iuru.
giant, }'}(!■(;, (ivriig,
gift, (^('.tpov.
give, fVf^///, ; give advice, rvujuuvn,).
glad, be, //(^oiuii.
glorious past, (^oin i-irapxuroa (d.).
glove, Ar/pig, u^^c (f.).
go, paiviu, tp\()ii(u, tii/i ; g, away,
('nrofSalvu ; g. on, yiyvoiuu ; g. on
board, see hoard ; g. out, l\:^:l)•
XoiKU ; g. up, ard.ialvo).
god, OnuiJ. God knows, vr/ Aia.
gold, xP^f^"? ; (a^^- ) XPi'<^^og.
gone, have, olx'iitat.
good, ('i}n66g (at, inf.).
Gorgias, Topyiac
government, o/. . rl TTfHiyuuruv.
governor, apfioaryr.
( J ranicus, Vpni'iuor.
grant, (Vh^mu. ; or use § 30.
grasj.'ing despot. s:iy : to one gra.s[i-
ing {n'/xovtiiTiD) and wronging
VOCAHULAUy,
151
At the
On till!
great, /nynt;.
greiitly, /ifynh,)r.
(Jreece, 'EA/laf, nthn; {(,),
(ireek, "llX/a/v, rjvng.
grey, 7roA/,(5c.
ground, ^vf.)/"'"'- f^" K- that, j^ 4<>, 4.
guard against, (lir'/nrToun/.
gui'ss, make u g. , i'ik(K('>.
guilty, be found g. of, aAiaKOjiai (g. ).
gulf, Kd'ATTOq.
(iyges, IV; '/C, «".
H.
hair, ^/)^", rptxuc (f,).
half, iijuavv, eta, v.
lialt, Kntiinrn/uu.
Halys, 'A?j<g.
hand, .tt/p, ,rf^'/" r (f.).
hands of, r-u, -/)of;(g.
one hand, /iti'.
hand over, ~p(nVt\ioiu, -imi//!
handsome, Kdh'ir.
hang, HiniiaviTiu.
ha])pen, (7i'ii,-iaiiu>, rv;. \<ir(.)
happiness, n^i^aiitoi'iti.
liapi)y, e.l'<h'uo)v.
harbour, '/t/ii/v, inig (in.).
hard, ;ifaAt7rof,
hard-liearted , (t prz/nr.
hardly (one). JSee p. -7,
liarm, sec do.
hat, -haaoq.
hate, ftiaiu.
hatred, f\t%', ,"'""r.
have, EX(->, <pfl>(-> (get).
he, t/cfii If, o('7ih;.
head, Kt<ja///.
heal', (tw'/(,).
heat, KuriKi, nrac.
height, to a great, £Tt //t7«.
"/.
•^7, (c).
Ilrllas, 'K'/'/i'i(\ liAfir;.
iiclp, liiiijtiH.) (d, ).
her, § 0, t).
herald, n'/fiv^, vunc,
h(!re, ndiii^t, \\v, h., rniiiiiii,
Herodotus, 'll/ioi^oro*;,
lirrself, (irr//.
liido, *5'7k), (vb, ) UnOKfivnTO).
liigh, vpihk.
highly, ~f/»A To/Port.
hill, <ii<i»n', iipor, (iir,
himself, avror.
his, g 9, 6.
history, ar; yinio/'/.
hold, ^V''', !~^'\<'>- I ')//'»'(.' ( — believe);
li. worthy, (tiioui ; h. oneself in
readiness, -aixinKniututiu.
ho'ue, o/hof, t:-' o'iKiiv (adv.).
1 ] onu;r, "0/////)')f .
lionest, ;v/'V^"''C-
honesty, ,|7"/'T"oi"W-
honour, ?///'/(.), (sb.) r/ii/'/.
honourable, w//(«c.
hope, //T(t-, /Am (f.), .•■/T/:*,) (have
hope).
hoplite, o-/.i-//r.
horse, Imror, j-r.wr.
horseman, Irr-i-vt;.
hour of departure, etc., say: you
shall now go away to the gods.
house, o'liiia, ('iviKir ; at my house,
rrr;/(' rii<ii .
how, ttCjC, <'"' (with adjs.); how
many, rruodi.
huge, /It-} ar r/r,
human, avi^pM-ivcr, iniipM-DV.
liuuger, >///''(..
hunting. ^'//'« ; love hunting, oz-'o-
hurt, (S'^diTTu.
G.
H.
J
J
K
N.
0.
a.
u
V
7
152
VOCAIJULAItY.
I.
I, /}M.
ice, Kiti'nTii^^Dt;.
identity of interest, rii ravTii nr/ioi-
peiv,
idle, apyd^.
idleness, in, npydq.
if, n. If ever, mv (§ 28, .?).
ignorance, I'limOiu,
ignorant, ufiaUr/^.
ill, KUKug.
ill, be, voato).
imagine, viro?M/if-)dvM.
immeasurably, m)?i'.
inmiediately, evOvg,
impiety, aaijitia ; commit impiety,
impious, aatftt'/g.
impose, frriTKh/iii.
impossible, a^vvarog.
in, h' (d.).
incentive, nvAjK?/.
incur danger, Kivdwivu.
imlignant, be, ayavnKrno (that,
§ 31).
individually, kuO' ha.
inevitably, use nrnyKi/ tdTi.
infatuated, fiupog.
inferior, jf '/Jwv.
inhabit, o/Kfw.
inhabitant, nolirrfi;, h oXkuw.
injure, (uhKeo), fi^aTTTu).
injury, for the, tm kokw.
injustice, (k^ikIu ; practise i., <'i(5/k/w.
injustice, suflier, Kuxfog Trdnxi-i.
inroad, rapa'/y. Make an inroad,
tOiiuAAli).
insolence, vftpH', fw; (f ).
insolent, v[ipiaTiii6g.
instantly, evdvg.
instead of, I'lvrl (g. ).
iriHtnimentality, thro., dm (g. ).
intend, d/iwitl-oiKii ; ^W, .'{.
interest, Tikut, i,iv ; with greatest
interest, t/dinrti.
interpreter, ip/o/irir, fur,
intervening, fit-d^r.
into, fig (a.),
invade, tniin^?M.
invasion, hjW/if.
invisible, noavi'ig.
invite, A«/tw.
involve, \). .S7, (10).
Ionia, 'Ir.HvVj.
ishunl, vFinitt; (f.).
it, §5>, 3, (2).
itself, by, avTot;.
J.
jealous, (pdoi'tpog.
journey, mtptia.
judge, Kftnijq, (vb.) Kpivu.
judgment, }i'w////; ijiniyj.,]*. tO, 11.
jiist, diKciittg ; j'ipox'^ ''■
justice, f5/K//, (huaiiicri'//.
K.
i\. ) : kf'cp
keep, (j)r'A<iTri,>, liiiniH.)
silent, aiynuK
kill, UTTDKTtivo).
killed, be, a-oVvi/ni^u.
kind, of the, see fiuch.
king, j^ani'/ti'g.
know, 0)6(1, trriordfidi, }i~} vunhi,).
knowledge, tiTmriipti.
L.
lal)our, -uviic, -pay/a/riid ', (vb.)
lake, '/luvT/.
VOCAIIUI.AUY.
loH
laiiil>, (//'lo'., iivu. iipvi'ir. (Seo
Diot).
land, yv, X'-'i"', ~''''^"^'- '''Y 1'^""^
K(ir<) yijv,
laiiguaj^f, yh't-TU.
iaryo, fnyiu: ; larj^e number, say :
many,
last, //fi'w.
last, at, t^/ih;.
latter, oiriir, o i)i ,
Laurium, Saiiinnv.
lavish, //f }'«f.
law, rd//of.
lay, TiOiiiii.
lay aside, sarnrlfteitni.
lay violent hands on, ,v/"j"/""
/3m/ wf (d.)-
lead, (7}<'' ; lead away, (i-mJ;*.) ; lead
hack, t-(iiv-^(,i.
leader, //Jf/"-'"', oi'^'C
leap down, udTam/cdu).
learn, //(irtiuru.
least, at, )t'.
leave, 'Atlnu.
Lesbos, OL Aiajiioi.
less, heIuv.
let go, (Kpli/fit.
letter, t-iard//'/.
liar, ftrnrf/r, or.
liberty, l.'nMtpia.
lie, /vf />». Tell a lie, i/'^ '''^"/""•
life, /-//of ; 1. of ease, Imarumi ; of
hisl., say "living."
light, f/»«C, -Of (n.), (vb.) ///nTn.).
like, o//o/'k;, -fm; (g.); §33, I;
(vb. ) //fUK+opt. with ui'.
likely, EiK«5f.
lion, X/wi', oiTof,
listen to, //mj/o, (/K/)o«o//at (g. ).
tie, <>'>i}'(ir, (adv.) u/i}oi>, uAi}ui
(with compar.).
live, /^')<.>, C'('''» ''"i/w; live on,
load, (ixO'K, '"C-
long, ?ro>/'; ; 1. after, tth'/v rnnimr;
1. ago, Tr<i/iu ; UH 1. as. n.ic (p.
!)i2, 4).
longer, no, oiWr/, ////h/r/ (ii§3(), 4),
adv. TTii'/J'v xi"'i''>^'
look at, f7Tifi7J::Ti,).
loosening, use X"^^"l""' (loost*) pre-
tlioatively.
lose, i'nr6'/'/.r/i/.
loss, be at a, (fXdjiiu),
lot, the common, use kihvuv niiaiv,
loud, f^iyag.
love, (/»//iw.
lower, iilih/in,
loyal, TTinrofj.
Lydian, AwJof.
M.
mad, be, /Kiiniiiiii,
magistrates, rd rf'/Ji.
maiden, K6f»/,
maintain, rphponai,
make, 7ro//w (§27, 2) ; m. use of,
XfMnfKU (d.); m. good use of, tv
Xi>ni)iMU.
man, oviip, fV"'f. «'•/'/"■■'"'".', nrpa-
r/(')r?/(;j rtg ( = anyone),
manage, ttih'itto).
mankind, ol aidpuinu.
many, mf/'Ani ; many times, ~n7,-
7ji~'n\ni(n.
Marathon, at, MnpnOuvt.
march, 636^ (£.), (vb.)^ nrjuimy,
EiaFhivvu ; m. across, vTztpiiaA/Ao.
mark, X'M^aKri/j) ; § 1"), (10).
M assagetae, IM naaa) erai.
master, (^taTrori/r.
matter, see thing.
I
J
K
I
M
N.
0.
a.
n.
T
u
V.
X
y
z.
154
VOCAHULAHY.
matter of, § 15, (10).
may, f^prrn ; m. say, rig ; § 25, 2.
maxim, the, t6.
moal, (^niTvav.
iiiean, t'lfii.
means, use ottwc (how). By means
of, fVrt (g. ).
measure, furpfu.
Median, t<')i> M//(5(,)/'.
Medon, M/(5wi'.
meet, hrvyx'"'''' (d.).
member of this liousi', rir.
mention, ?/}« (a.),
messenger, ayyrhir,
middle, fitaac (§ G, 1).
midnight, /ifrrf) vv^.
midst, see middle.
mildness, use Trpdug.
Miletus, M ////,-.';?.
mind, <ppr/v, fvoc, yv(',iti?/,
misdeeds, tu Ttt-.ixpayiirva.
misfortune, to aTrori'VfTi',
mistake, make, aiKiprin'i,).
momentary, TraparrlKd.
money, XP'II'-'^'", 'ip] ifnov.
mont^", /////', /i}/ri'ir (ni.).
monument, [ivFijin, aror.
more, tt/Jov, luOjor ; one m., tri
f:'iC ; be no ni., o''i<h/ t'irai.
morning, from, m tov Tvpon,
mortal, OD/rog.
most, /niAinra.
most people (men), '// Tro'v.ni tdp
a)'ftpU7TUV,
mother, ftijTijp, rpor.
mount, trr/fialro), (sb. ) opar, nrr,
mountain, ()()'ic, ovg.
move away, (nroKivtw.
niu(!h, 7rfi/l?jr, (ndv.) ~it7'/i'i in- -d'/'/u.
(withcompar.); very much, -/(T-
ara.
mule, Tjiiiovog.
multitude, o'l. nn?2oi.
nuist, f^el.
my, sfiog.
myriad, fivpinr, ui^ng (f. ).
Mysia, Mwj/a.
N.
name, ovofia, (vb. ) na'/f ok
narrative, use (hrjyeoiini (narrate),
narrow, rrr.- voq.
nation, ffivnc, Tra'/ir, '/iuq.
native country, TZfirpig.
naturally, t/Korwr.
nature, (f)VGtq, eoig (f. ). What its
nature was, use ~(ii(ig.
Xaupactus, NarrrahTor.
near, 7rf/;/'(a. ), oxK^yv.
necessity, avir/Kt/,
need, (Uofin/, (h-7. In u. of, h<(k>/r.
neglect, use ydu) (leave alone).
neighbour, y-fircov, ovog,
neither, .nor, orrs . .o'rrt:,
never, oi'TrnTs,
new, K(i/v6g.
next, mrfpnlng.
night, vv^, vviiTog (f. ) ; by n , i'vk-
~6g ; one u., rorf,
night-fall, at, 1-6 v 'uxra.
nightingale, aijfiun', 6vng (f.).
Nikias, 'KiKing.
iiol)lest, see /^ro-.^'.
nobody, <i!'('iilr.
no, no man, see no o»f.
no more, 1 am, orkiri r'lin.
no one, none, ohthig, ////'V/r, p. 117.
not, § 4(5 ; not even, ol'M- ; not
only, oh /ii'yov.
nothing, or(5/ ', p//(\ii-.
nocidng to do, p. 40, 11.
V0CA15UI,AUY.
15o
(narrate).
\Vliat its
of, h'rh/jr.
done).
by n , I'l'A-
(f.).
Fir, p. 11/,
'I'rAi- ; not
notice, see escape.
now, vvv.
^umautia, ^ov-Mvrla.
Numantines, yovi/avTlvni.
number, ajxHuor ; smaller n., i'/dn-
Govtq; greater (larger) n., -/tv-
ovef.
numerous, tto/ic.
()! that, § 30.
oath, bphix; ; tak'? an o., inivvin \
break an ()., -(ipa^aivt,) ; keep an
o., iuiihio ((1.).
o'oey, tteWoiku (d.).
object, use relative,
obscure, IsnoKnTfui (d.).
observe, I'OfiiCu).
ol)tain, Tiryxdvw, /a/i^ui..', -apa/rl--
uiiai.
occupy, u'lKtoj, na-a/auAuvii).
off, Kara (a. ).
offer sacrifice, (^iu).
offer prayer, Evxo'ic-i.
otlice, apx'l.
often, Tn'/JaKir.
old, ■jra/Mioq, nptaArr, upxainr.
old age, yvpar, w<: (n.).
ohl man, } fp*."', ovror.
Olympiad, 'O'/vtt-inc, </'^"f; (f.).
Olympus, "O'kvfL-oq.
Olynthian, 'Oz/wf^/oc.
on, t^' (g.), £" (<1.) ; <»f time, §'_'•-', .'i
on his own account, f^-' afcnli'.
on our side, i^d' iiikm'.
once, TTOTf, TTfmcikv.
once, at, c('f^i''C.
.^'\e, r/f.
one another, lu7li>un\
one. . .another, «>/"? JifMir.
one and only, /ioi'of '5^/.
one man ..another, ////or . . .dz/of.
oneself, fnv-lw.
o[K'n, stand, arii.tyn.
o[>eidy, i'jo.vij )(',)!■.
opiniim, yruiii)/ ; be of o. , <^in\n (d. ).
opportunity, Ka/ixU;.
opposite party, ni ,-7.7)0/.
ol)[)ressor, use 7rM:ovEKTi:a).
or, ;/.
or indeed, ^■v(5f.
oracle, /.6y/oi>.
orator, /)//rw/).
ordain, rdaao).
order, Kt'/Elo) ; without order, o~-
0^76)^; send round or crs, rrf/)/-
a;}'f/7;w. In order that (to), Via
(S-'9).
other, (i/,tof ; o < k.
ought, XP'/, '^^'^- '^<-'*^ 5 -i--
our, /'/uhtpoc; ; ourselves, /'/iifir a!'-
701.
out, tK, a-() (g.) ; out of, he (g.).
out-stretched, use kicrtivo).
over, fT( (a.), w/ra (a.) ; over and
over, TTo/i/.a/c/f ; over against, trri
overawe, HdraTT/j/Tro).
overtake, }i}'V»/i(u (d.).
own, § 1), 7.
o.v, ,:ioi'f, '^"of.
P.
])ain, 7f~K.).
painless, n'/i-ror.
jt.alace, .-inniAFKiv.
palm, TO r'im,).
parent, ymrvr, Uoc^.
part, id-por, '"": ', it is the ]). , § 1"),
( 1 (»). The larger p. , <>l TcVxinvi-r ;
for the most p., p. 43, 8.
partly. . .partly, rh nh. . .to fie.
0.
?.
a.
n.
T
u
V
v/
X
y
z,
156
VOCABULAUY.
I
pass through, (^ia3niv(.y.
passion, TrdOng, ovg, opyij.
patriot, (hjtiQTiKoq.
pay, /uGe6g, (vb. ) a~nfii(hjin.
peace, elp^/vrj ; be at peace, e'lpi/i't/i'
ayu [with, Trpoc (a. )].
Pegasus, UyyaGog,
Pelion, U?'/2,iov.
j)enalty, C'Z/ita.
penny, /)/?o/loC.
people, 6F^iiog, avftp(o-nt.
people at large, /t^r.
people say,use Tifyoficu (personally),
perceive, alaOctvo/mi.
perception, to vofiv.
perform, rrodu (every act, -avm).
perforinance, use inf. of 77««6).
perhaps, 'inoig.
Perganios, l\t:i)}(iiioc.
Pericles, UipiKAi/g, iovg.
perish, a-671viiaL.
Persia, Xl^pnig, 'n^oq (f.), '»i Hf/'f^"'-
Persian, Tlipaijg.
person, rtq.^ ahrdv, or omit.
persuade, TrtiOo),
persuasion, by, Trslaag.
Philip, ^'i'/cTT-ng.
philosopher, c/)/?„o(To^of.
philosophy, <pi?.o(j<)<l>!(i.
piety, £('f7s,de<«.
pile, no^pog, (vb.) r'dhaai.
pine away, ri/Kouai..
\nons, £vni-$>jg.
])iously, Evnufiag.
pitch, such a p., k rnvrn.
pitch on, iaiTa?M/i.-iavu).
])ity, (HKTtipio.
place, Tf'/Toc, ;rw/j/'"', (vl). ) rilh/iu
place on (upon), iTnTilh//u.
plague, voaog {{.).
plain, TTff^ioi'.
plan, use demonstr.
Plato, U/.nriov, btvog.
pleasant, ?;f5rf, «T«, ^.
pleasure, //(hv?/ ; w'th p., >'/(^nor.
pledge, ("if^/u ; redeem a pledge,
i^FiSaicoj ; violate a p., Trapni^aivu.
plume oneself, hyalloum [on, (d.)
orfTt (d.)].
plunder, ap-^ayi], (vb.) AtiiC,onai.
Plutarch, Jllov-apxog.
poet, -rroniriig.
l)oison, ('/ipitaKOv.
policy, omit,
political measures, -F-nlirevfiha.
poor, -//7/c, ?r"f-
populate, o'lKtiu (inhabit).
population, use oiKfw.
populous, use o'iKEui.
position, r6r:og.
possess, pf. of KToo/iat.
possession, nTf/iin, arog ; take p. of,
possiVde, 6vva-6g, § 23, 8.
pour, ;\:^w.
power, ^rvafiig ; in one's p., say :
of one, §15, (10) ; be in one's p.,
p. 107, 6.
powerful, fivva-og.
practice, for, fie^.hrig hem.
practise, andn^ai.
practise injustice, nf^ihrw.
practise justice, (h^aKiTrpnytu).
praise, k-aivng, {\\).) 't~nivru).
praise-worthy, e-nivfTog.
pray, ^r<i ; p. 40, 10.
precauti<ms, say : these things.
]irecious, riiuog.
prefer, a'iphiiiiii, TTixtTi/iaw.
preference, in p. to, avri (g.).
I a pledge,
7rnpni3ai ro>.
cu [on, (d.)
ATjit^auai.
n7uTevfiha.
fc).
; take p. of,
8.
le's p., say :
e in one's p.,
VEKa.
fTvpnyfu).
'■—(iivfu).
roc.
s(! things.
IK no.
ivri (g.).
VOCARULAKY.
157
preparation, TrnfxinKfvt) ; make p.
-=preparc.
prepare, TvaixiaKtrudi^ojiai.
present, vvr ; be p., ndpet/it (at,
tig) ; on the p. occasion, tTvl tov
T:aj)6i<Toq.
prevail, trnKpaTso), viKiiu.
prevent, KwTiVtx).
price, at p., § 14, 3.
pride oneself, see plume,
prisoner, alx/i<'i'/M)r(,g (with, p, 109,
10).
prizes, noblest, say : greatest
things,
proceed, use ?/'V (now),
prodigy, G>/ficloi'.
pro li table, avfi(j)of)ng.
promise, or make p. , v7ziaxvt-0fJ.ai.
promontory, uKpuv.
proof, ? 15, (10).
property, K-i\uaTn, or use art.
prosecute, (5<waw, ypdfo^ai (for=
gen.),
prosper, EVTvxeu).
prosperity, ei'Tvxtn.
provide, nopiCofiui.
provisions, e-irr/tkia. wv.
■ounish, Ko?.d:^u).
punished, be, <5/k?/i' <^'(^w//<.
pursue, dtcjhiu).
pursuer, 6 (huKwv.
push on, tTTelyofiai.
put on, hduw (another), h'(h'>v(.>
(oneself) r p. up, KaTdyopai ; p.
to death (the sword), n-imrni'u) ;
be p. to death, aTToBvyoKu.
put (question), tpujrduj.
Q.
quarter, give, Cioyptw.
(jueeu, jiaai'keui.
question (vb.) tpurdm ; every (j. ,
TrdvTa.
([uickestway, by the, r/^r r(i\inr//r.
(piickly, rax'i'-
([uiet, remain, /'/ni'xinv tr/M.
R.
race, yhng, (wg.
ruiu, vyTog.
raise, aip<i), cry?.?/'}'w (of ships) ; r. a
siege, d-aviaTa/iai .
rampart, relxog, ovg.
rare, arr-dviog.
ravage, Tfim,), (hfidi,).
reach, u(pii;vi()ii(u tg (a.).
ready and willing, f'wjr, di'Tog.
r«ally, dpn, tu> uvti.
re-ascend, dvtpxof^ai.
reason, '/oyog.
receive, iU:xo/iai; r. a favour, n
■Knifn/tm,
reconcile, mTn'/ldTTi.).
recover, dvaAan(idvo).
reduce, moarptcpo/ini.
reduction, use vironTpfOonui [vv
diice).
refer, iiravtpx^lJ-ai' [to, tig (a.)].
relit, trciaKEvdZci.
reflect, ?.oyi^o/iiai.
refrain from, use /n).
refuge, mrndvyii ; tlee for refuge,
Kdraiptryo).
vchiSG, oh (j)7)fii, oil ,3<}v'/<>u('i, npno-
ftai.
regard, with r. to, -por (a.).
region, A''V«-
rejoice, //(htiai (d.).
release, dipiiiiii.
remain, r. in force, itevu.
remark, the, rd.
remedy, (j)dptiaM'i^^
a.
K
S.
T
u
V.
X
y
z.
158
VOCABULARY.
rcmeinber, [I'fjivrjfiai.
remind, iiiiivi/aKO.
ruiuove, h rroKo/ii^'j),
repair, t/j^o//a<.
reply, (i7r<)Ki)ivo/iai.
report, ayy&J.u.
request, omit.
re(|uire, see need.
rescue, a<')^(,).
resist, avrtxi'^ {<l.).
resolve, rWri (d. ),
respect, in many other r. , (i/?j/
Trn/Jj'i ; win r., Tijuno/mi. ; witli
r. to, tQ.
responsibilities, assume, etc.,
■nOiFlv d XP'J TToit'Ti' h> rro/.fv
rest, avarravatQ^ avd-av/.a (f. ),
nra~av(j) (vb. ).
rest, the, 6 a}J/^oQ.
restore, aardyi,}, a-oiVii'^uin.
result, use Trpdrrc) ; according to
r. , Trpof TO EK idv.
retreat, di'ax<Ji»/'yi<;, fw;, (vl». )
dvax('}pt:o).
return (home), Kam^L.
revelry, kmi/o^.
revolt, after the, say : they had
revolted {d(pin7//ui).
I'evolve, 6iai>oio/n(ii.
reward, (^unou,
rhinoceros, /V i 'o/cf/xjc,' .
rich, 7TAov(7/nr.
ride, klnvvu). "^rheir ride liad
taken, etc.. say : they had
ridden even far.
ridge, '^^(^oq.
right, p. 104, 8 ; on the right, iv
vi-tta ,
rightly, upOox;.
ring, <5u/iTj')/i()f.
ri.se, x''Y^"'''
river, TrnTdiioC.
road, odix; (f ).
rob, cmoaTEptij, avhiw.
Roman, twv 'Pw//a/wv.
rose, podov.
rough, (ilning.
royal, omit.
ruin, dia<p0t:ipu).
rule, dpxo), (sb. ) dpxv. Of his ruh;,
say : ruling,
ruler, dpxoiv.
rumour, (/>///i//.
run, Tpfx<^-
run away (from), d-rrodtdpudKu),
s.
sacred, (isyaq.
sacrilice, 'ifpd, mc, (vb.)^ua».
safe, nooa'/.i/i;.
safety, daod'hua. In s., say : safe.
sage, ano6(;.
sail, •k7J-(.) ; s. away, d-o-7rb); s.
out, tKTT/tU).
sake, for sake of, ivtKd (g. ).
salute, rrpoOKrvii.,.
same, d avrdr.
Samos, )S(///()t.
satisfy, Kopfrrvin.
save, rT(u,'a>.
say, ?>;w, o'/tii. Might say, p.
29, (e).
scatter, n-tipw, nKtddvpvui.
school, ol diioi (a.),
scoff at, nKurrrw.
sea, f)d/.(iTTa. By s. , unrd Odi'/nrTui',
sea-iight, ixivunxin.
search, in s, of, ett! (a, ),
second, on the s. day, drvrtpninc;.
secondly, ETztt-a, dt.
f.
P' .
Ofhiarult
^luiCTKu}.
,, say : s.ifi-,
Mg.).
;ht say, p.
'I'UZ.
ra 0(1/(177(11',
(^f')i7f/)O/0C.
VOCAIUJLARY.
159
security,- with greater s., na'.W/-
'AeaTti)ni>.
sedition, nT('tn/(\ twi (t. ).
see, opt'ioj, ji/irruj.
seek, C'/"'".
seem, ('jXuvDitai ; it seems, (''('/..' i.*
(personally, § ol>, h).
seize, /aw/iafw.
self, awrof.
sell, Trt,)'/Iu.
send, Tiqi-uid.
send for, iirrarcHi-ouai.
sensation, ro 'iJnOdiraOtu.
servant, 6(w/ji(;.
serve, vTrr/ptTeu) (d.).
service, v7r//()f(:l(L.
set (of the sun), (Vrouai ; set down,
KarariOr/in ; set one's luart o ,
tTTieviiKo (g.) ; set over, .'-/rilh/n
(d. ). '
set out, -oini'oiiai.
severe, /3«/j/'(;, e/», v.
shade, amd.
shame, a'laxvn/.
shameful, a'i(7xi»'": ; shameful deaili,
ainxi>i'><;-
sheep, oig, uuK-
shepherd, 7701 ulji; fmr.
ship, V(ih\ vn'.nj (f.).
shoe, i'Troih^iia. ari-c.
shoot, TO^'-VO).
short, /•J/>« li'".'. '''•'. -■'•
should, see oKi/hL
shout, ;->iiino.
show oneself, otunuiai.
shower kindness ujion, f r -nniv.
side, 77An'jn'i, (»; ; on tlie side of, p
51. 3, (1).
aitrn? anjinov.
signify, diaotjM.
silence, to atytiv.
silent, see keep.
silviT, ('ljf}Vj}<)(-.
simple, drrMor.
simplicity, arr/dr//!:, //ror (f. ).
sin, dunpTiivo),
sing, di^o).
sink, KaT(i.6oi'(o.
sir, use w aw^/jfr 'AOi/vd/di ; my g.
s, , 6'j i'iiAria7t.
sit, (sit down), mO?/fini.
skdful, (hiv6(:.
skill, tii77Hf)ln.
sky, ovpavi'ic;.
slave, (W'/of;.
sleep, v-ror, (vl>.) K«^f ''"'"•
small, /tiKjmg.
snail, (>:o.Y/'"C, '"'•
so, o'vr(,)g (see </(»••<), wffrf.
so many, rooorrot.
so much, rorr(;r-or.
Socrates, Sw/v/7ar//(;, 01,'c.
soft, na7nK6r^.
soldier, crjniTu,)7iiq.
solemn, ii!iy(i<:-
Solon, So/.wv, uvo<,\
some. T^f, (pl.)oi "'^'MP 1<^ 3).
somebody, some one, '";.
something, "'.
sometimes, § 3'J, 7.
son, '''<>(.'•
soon, rr/.VH.":.
soothsayer, ^'/''-'C, f^C-
Sophocles, I,oc;,(iK?j/<;, ;"i'<;.
sorrow, ?-i'~'/, «?}"';, ^■'"'"''>
soul, Ti''i',Y^/-
source, ~?/y//.
south, ii£0!/n3pi(i.
sovereignty, 'i^'A'/-
sp:
Lired, be, ui
;c- "' u// iirroOdi'tli'.
sparingly, fitrpiuit;.
s.
T
u
V.
TV'.
7
IGO
VOCAnULARY.
Sparta, AnKFJai/xuv, nvor (f. ).
Spartan, AniiEiVu/inv/nr, 'ilrrdiir/ari/r.
s])eak, 'Aeyo), nroi' ; s. ill of, i<tiix>/-
ynpko; s. trutli, a/Jidtvu.
sjiecified, p>jt6(;.
spectator, Benryg,
speech, to ?a/,nv.
speed, at full speed, ai'u KpuTog.
speedily, rnxv.
spend, <hnTf)i3(o (of time),
spider's web, ai>i'ixi'"'i>.
spirited, use ■KpoBvin,)^.
spoil, 7.n(i.
spring, lap, yp^c (n.).
stag, t/.ntpog,
stand, 'ifjTaimi, karz/Ka (aor. inrz/r) ;
s. by, use rrdpian/i/!. (d. ) ; .s.
open, § 20, 2.
state (country), ~o//f ; iu this state'.
eV TOvTO),
statue, avfiping, (ii'-o(; (ni. ).
stead, in, v-tp (g. ).
steal, K/J~T(o,
still, in, u/ioc.
stomach, ynnr/'/p, rp6(j (f. ).
stone, ?.l9og.
storm, \einun>, (',)V(tQ (m. ),
straits, in what, h niatg.
stranger, ^tvi)^.
straw, 6pi^, rptx^k (f-)-
street, of5of (f. )> <';'''«.
strength, ('ivva/iKj, aHivog, rn>(;.
strike, tv-ti,).
strong, iax>'p6g, (h^varng.
struck, use Bav/tn^o) (wonder).
struggle, ayuyvi^oiiai.
Strymon, 'SiTpvLtuv, orog (ni. ).
subject, vrr/iKong, apxoini'Dr,
succeed, KnrnpOoco.
success, TO fh -paTTFiv,
such, such a one, tou.vtoc.
sucli things as this, Tutd'rTit.
sillier, irdrTxi'K
suirur punishment, (J/av/j' <h'(^u)ui.
SUlfcr wrong, aihM/ -ri(T;y;w.
suffice, =be sufficient.
sxdlicient, inavSg,
summer, Okpog, ovg.
sun, ?///(>f.
Snnium, "Ln'vvtnv.
sunsei:, y/Jov (Sva/uai, or use gen.
a))solute.
superior, (i/hfivuv ; showing supe-
rior virtue, say : being better.
suppose, 1, (^/j-ov.
surely not, pur.
H ^11 prised, be, Ihwpn^u).
surrender, Tzapadhkoiu (tr.), twW-
surround, kvk?.6o).
suspect, i'TTOTTfiu.
sweet, y(^l->g, eta, v.
sword, ^i(por, nvg.
T.
table, TpaTrt\(i,
take, ?Ji/i;idmo. unTu/Mufidvio.
take counsel, j3ov?,Eioiiai.
take from, dfuipiu.
talent, Ta/MVTov
tall, fxfyng.
task, tpyov.
teach, (kddaKO).
teacher, dMoKaTiog,
tear, i^dKpvov.
tell, 7iyo).
temple, vaog, ov.
tent. rr",//)'?/.
terms, bring to t. , see bring: on
such t., f~' TOlo'vTOig.
terrible, i^avoi;.
t<
t(
t!
tl
tl
>>'
ill.
^i(^U>llt,
use gen.
ng supe-
better.
r. ), h'iSt-
I'CO.
>>'
>riiuj : on
VOCABULARY.
Ifil
terrify, (jinfifi.).
territory, X'''l"'-
than, y.
tliank, T t. you, X'''I>'C ''',"'''' i^"'')-
that, i)7i, I'.iarr ; (pruii.) thhivnr ;
U'd ' §31. And tliat too, k<i'i
ra'fra.
the, o, ?/, TO,
Theban, ^i]3alar.
Tliebes, Of/ 3(11, (~.n>.
theft, k'/.otzIi.
their, § 9, 0, 7.
them, § 9, 3, (2).
then, ovv, tote, i--ctTa.
there, hid.
therefore, ovv, apn, -ohivv.
thereupon, y-t/ni.
thick, (^(laix, na, v.
tiling, TTimyim.
think, (Ho/Kii, rnii!^(,).
thirst, (^/i/'a.
tliis, ovTor.
those who, § 3, 1.
though, even though, laii-yi), §35, ().
Thracian, 0/^/5, {"«'":.
throne, npx'i-
tln-ough, i^ii'i (g.).
throw, /)(-7(,), ,-i('iy/i.>
throw away, a-o))j)i-Tu).
throw together, nvftpi-Tu).
Thucydides, OovKViVn^iir.
thunder, jSpovT/'j.
thus, ovTug or, before a consonant,
ii'rTO).
Tiberius, Tz/^i/woc.
till, pvTPMg.); §:^-t. -i-
■ timber, v/>i.
time, xi'^'^'"'-' ' '^^ '*' *•' ''"'" ^'"^'^ ' '''^
that t.. Torr; in t. of, n' (d.) or
p. 53, (h) ; of hist., k«'^' fai'ror.
times, of former, Trfur, -n'Acu.
11
to, I'lr (a. ), TTpor, tiri (a.).
to-day, of, vvv.
t(jil, TTOWf.
Tomyris, luiwpiq, loq.
too, § 23, 0.
torture, ■Knx.u.
touch, (inTOfiai (g. ).
towards, ~/«ir (a.).
town, iiorv. air (n.).
trade, rf';^i'//,
transact, Trixirroi,
treason, ^fHK^onia.
tn :ity, see ^r?tcfi.
tree, dkm'^pov.
trench, Tuopor (f.) ; make (a
trench), i'/avvu).
tribute, (l)6po(;,
trireme, rfin'ipK, <>r<: (f. )■
trophy. Tjiii-iniir.
troHl)le, -ovor ; give trouble,
7r«/)f;^w —p('i)U(iTa.
truue, n-ariSai, uv.
true, ahfiij<:.
truth, n/Jiikia.
truth, speak, ah](hru\
try, -tipi'u.i, or use pres.
turn, r/)t77(,;, arpitjiu) ; intr., r/^iTo-
twice, f5/f.
two-thirds, '^''" /'f^>'/-
tyrant, is a tyrant , use Ik^kIu.
U.
understand, avvi///ii (g.).
undertake, nlpouut.
undone, be. a-o/Mi?M.
unexpected, "«pa tloiuv.
! unfavourable, x«''f'~'H'-
I , . /
uniitness, (iXpiiGTia.
unfortunate, (Jiwrux '/(-'•
u,
V.
162
VOCAJUTLARY.
tin just, (uhKor.
nnleas, t'l //;/.
unobserved, use ?.«/'9^jw.j (p. 1U!),7).
uiireasonal)k', (irn-ix-.
until, itixi>i (m-) ; ?5->^, 4.
untried, // -rifxirai;.
unworthy, avii^ioq,
unwritten, aypaoot;.
up, dvd (a.).
upon, r-i (d.).
U})on, down, unrd (g. ).
Uise, x/"'"/^"'- ('^O ; "sed t(., use
inipf. ; make good use of, sec
iiKike.
useful, xpliatiiog [for, t'lq (a. )].
useless, utterly, ovtVtv (dii>khfwq.
V.
A'alliaWe, ~n}7.n'i' u^/or, riuior,
value, ~i)n-nuai.
vanish, dil>nvii^()imi.
vast, lityag.
venture = dare.
verge, use r!xf'V)v ri (nearly),
very, rrdvv, ahrdq, or superl.
victims of aggression and wrong,
rori; -'/i-ovtKTOvufmiH; Ktii ('nhKon-
iifi'oi'r.
victor, pf. part, of ivw/o.
victorious, l)e, vtKnio.
victory, riK//.
villnge, Kuii/j.
violate, ^(ipcSnii'o).
violation, in v. of, -afu'i (a.).
violence, rd ftiam.
violent, iih.nc ; v. hands, see laij.
virtually. riJ hvri.
virtue, dptr/'j.
visible, (pnvf-pdc.
vision, in a, aar' bvap.
voice, 0(.u'//.
Vf)W, t\\\t)ll(U.
voyage, ~M)vi;, tt/.oI;
W.
waggon, diiai'a.
wait, iniHj.
waken, yynptj,
wall, ~tl,\'><J, '"%'•
want, dfoiiai (g. ), Soi'/niuit.
war, "(V/miir ; make war (against)
TTo'/.f I /.!(<) ('I. ).
warn of, d/ddn'M.
waste, diarpij-iuK
watch, be on watch for, rtjpi'ui \
Avatch over, i^ '_'(), '_'.
water, vih,)p, arnr (n.).
way (manner), rndrrmj ; in this w.,
Toi'TOV Tot' ~pd-i)r,
weak, dntkvipj.
wealth, TT/oii-or.
W'ealtliy, -'/ovnux;.
wear the crown, ''/M'''-
wear out, d-nrpi.-ii,).
weary, ])f. pai't. of Kufivu (be
weary),
weep, dai<pl'(,).
weigh anchor, a'ipi.).
welcome, de^opdi, (adj.) //di'r.
well, ev ; be well, tr ,'■>:<.).
west, h-epn.
what, interr. , r/V ; rel. or; what
is expedient, "'< ni'iKJiipnv,
whatever, ('«; di\
what (kind), rroior.
when, !^84, 3.
whence, dUtv, Trdt^fv.
whenever, urnv (§28, 8).
where, tzdv, ttoI.
where . . f rom=whence.
VOCAHULAUY.
Ifi.'i
-///irw ;
flTf
wherefore, (^n) ri.
wherever, 'o-or in', li-oi iii>,
whether, § .S7, T).
whether . . or, -iWtfxiv . . //,
f ;:r(-, (55 37, T)).
which of two, -uTtfiiKj.
while, fi.'C.
who, (V(this), //, '<> (rel.), r/'c (inter.).
whoever, unrir, 'or, iir.
whole, (>/jir, ni'iij.
wicked, TToVi/piir.
wife, } iw//, aiKor.
wild l)east, %)''or.
willing, be, ,h'vAniiai, twiw tlmt.
willingly, ti<(',)v, ]). 10"), 9.
win, see day.
wine, oli'of.
wing, TTrepi'iv.
winter, x^'M'-"'. '^"'"(.' ('"•)•
wisdom, (TO(/»ia.
wise, no(l)6g.
wish, fto'r/Miia/ ; 1 wish that, § 3().
with,, p. 39, 6 ; nh> (d. ), uera (g. ) ;
with respect (regard to), n; (a.),
Trpof (a.) ; with that, say then.
withdraw, a-tpxouat.
without, "i-fi' (g.).
witness, /mprvg, vpog.
wolf, yvKog.
wonder, Oalua, arnc) (vb. ), 9iiv-
filial.).
wonderful. OavinK—w:, ( V/ iVx;.
word, h'tyoi;.
work, ^pyov, rr/>voc.
woi'hl, in th«! world, on. (befort;
superl.) >i'J.'), 8 ; where in th*-
world, ~iir ) i/i;.
worthy, h^mr ; w. to be, I'iioK -\-
inf. act.; w. of all praise, t~(in>-
fTOf.
worthy, hold, uiioi,!.
would, ^nl'/ (1/1(1/ ; 55*28, 2.
wretched, ('ilO kxj.
w rite, ypi'iot.i.
wrong, a(5/Mf,) (vb. ), ra (k^iku (sb. );
be not far wrong, piY/a uplh.u-
iSoKil (d,).
X.
Xerxes, z.ip^tiq.
Y.
yawn, use avniyvrm (^'26, '2).
year, troij, '"''. tnarri'ic ; many y.,
77nA?aiT>/[^'2L-2, (3)1,
yearly, /»'""' irKivroi'.
yos, § 13, 8.
yet, «V^
yield, EV^ldufii.
you, rr/', fwtTf.
your, Gor, i'/nrfpnc.
y<iurself, avruQ, aravTov.
z.
zealous, 77 pdAiifxtig.
Zeus, 'At 're, A(o(,.
a,
V.
X.
/■
z.
PART II.
EXERCISES BASED OX XEXOPHON,
ANABxiSIS, II /.. < ^H. i.-viii.
I
I
PART II.
FXEIM.'ISKS r.ASKI) ON XKNOl'lK )N,
ANABASIS, liOOK T., cu. i.-viii.
KXKIKMSK 1.
(/>Vj.W im Xni., Aiiah., l'>. i., ch. i., Jii*l-B.)
(The imineralH refer to tlie sections and paraKrivplw of Part I.)
Darius, acconlin^'ly, made Cyrus a satrap and j,'av(; him a
priuoipality (<ii>xv) to govern. And not long (ttoXv) after that,
Darius died, and Artaxerxes, tlie elder brother of Cyrus, he-
came king. But it hai.pened that Cyrus was unfriendly to
Artaxerxes and began to plot against him (/>/////:), with the in-
tention of revolting^ and making himse'd' king in his stead. Now
the Peloponnesians and most of the other Ci reeks in the cities of
his principality were frien.lly to Cyrus. He collected of these,
therefore, as many as he could and made them hoplites, taking
great pains to render them competent to go to war with the
Great King. But these proceedings,-' though Cyrus attempted
to conceal them {impJ:),^veve all reported to the king, who arrest-
ed Cyrus with the intention of putting him to death. And this
],e would have done,=^ if their mother, who had more affection
for Cyrus than for the elder brother, had not begged his life
from the king.
i§4l, 'i. '■'Say </it»[/s. 3jj;io^ •_>, (3).
EXEKCISK 2.
iBnml on Xm., Annh., B. i., oh. i., SSl-11.)
But Cyrus wished to colle<-t a large army in order to make
war upon his brother. A.hI to do this,' he pr<.ceeded (use
[167]
168
KI.KMI'.M'AUV (;U1:KIv VnOHK CO.Ml'OfSITIOV.
TToUw) as follows:- He first iiiade war upon Tissapliei-nes, who
happond to Ixv' in Miletus, and laid siege to that town. This
be (lid in ordci* that ho ini,i,dit be able to maintain soldiers
without the knowl(«di,'(; of the king.'' On the otner hand lie
lent aid^ to the (JriH'ks, and all the Greek cities in the Cher-
sonese were fi'iendly to him and sent him money and soldiers.
He also made certain Greek generals his friends. Among
these were the Spartan (Jlearchus and Proxenus of P>oeotia, to
whom Cyrus sent g(»ld and ord(H-ed them to collect troops for
him. When tlu^y had done so, they joined him with their
armies under colour'"' ,)f making war uj)on Tissa])hernes, on the
ground that Tissaphernes was trouhliiig tin,' king. Tn this
way the king thought that his l)rotlier was collecting an army
to lend liim assistance against the plots of Tissaphernes.
igns, 2, note. ^\\, 2. 3§41, 7. *§49, 3. "^§49, L' ; §41, 3.
EXEHCISK 3.
(Baurd oil Xcii., Amih., W. r., v\\. ii., 1-0.)
And so tliese generals joined Cyiu at Sardis. But Cyrus
did not go agaii ^t TissaphcMiies as he had pi-omised. He said
that he was going to mai-ch against the Pisidians, and going to
expel tliem from the country in which they then dwelt. So
they all set out to march uj) witli him through the country
towards the land of the Pisidians. In all this, however,
Cyrus did nr)t escape the notice of i Tissaphernes, who hac -for
many months In^en observing his proceedings/' H(^ therefore
repaired with all hast(! to the king and told him that he thought
that Cyrus had tak(!n the field against him and not against
the Pisidians. "if he were going itgainst Pisidia," \n\ said,
"he would not have so large a foi-ce (frroAos) as he has." When
the king heard this, \n\ hcliescd Tissaphernes and pmceeded to
make prf^paral ions'' to resist (7r/ios) Cyrus.
EXERCISES.
169
EXLKCISE 4.
{Based on Xr»., Aiiah. 1>. i., cli. ii,, 7-12.)
From this city Cyrus in.irchorl witli the army tlirough the
country to Cehieuae. It was hero that Apollo is said t<; have
vanquished Marsyas and flayed him. It was here also that
Xerxes is said to have built a citadel. For he iiad been de-
feated in a great battle by the Grei Vs and was retreating witli
his army through that country. Hei-e, then, Cyrus remained
a whole month. The sol(li(>rs were asking him every day^ for
their pay.- But he could not give them it, because he had no
money. Cyrus was a good deal [n^e iroXv) annoyed because of
his inability'' to pay up their arrears [iise 6(/)et/\w). If he had
had the money, he would ha\e given it to them gladly {y'lSao';).
Exi;k(.'ise a.
(liami on Xni., Anuh., I*., i., cli. ii., i;i-20.)
Here Epvaxa begged of (H'rus to hold a review of his army.
He accoi-dingiy \u Id a review both of the Greeks and of the
I»arbarian.s, ordering each of the gexierals to draw up his own
men as the custom of his countiy was. This they did and
tlu! queen wondered at the splendour of the army, as she rode
past the phalanx in Ikm- war-; luiriot. After she huO ridden
past them, the Gre«>ks ad\aneed with aloud shout upon the
tents of the Barbarians who, whoji they saw them advancing,
abandoned their tents and fled. For a gi-eat (h^ead of the
Greeks fell up(m them {use ylyi'oiJ.ai.). They thought that the
Greeks would kill' them and plunder their tents. Th(>refore
they lied anl the queen with tlicm. And Cyrus was gn^atly
dt'iighte<l when he saw the fcai- (»f tlu. G ceks that the liar-
bariaiis had.'- But the Gret;ks i-etired With laughter to their
tents.
1 py, \i. ^ Say what fear ; §37.
70
ELKMKNTAHY (JKKKK I'ROSK COMTOSITION.
ExEncisi-: G.
(Ihtxid oil X'li., AiKih., V>. I., cli. ii., '-M-127.)
lloi'o Cyrus saw that lie inust^ ascend tlie mountains in
order to enter Cilicia. I>ut wlieii lie learned that Syennesis
was guariHiit;- the pass and the heights, he remained a \\\\o\i\
day- on the plain. Then he crossed the mountains and ad-
vanced to the city of Tarsi. This large and prosperous city
he learned had been plundered by his genin-al Menon, for the
following reason:-' Two companies of ]Menon's soldiers, in
crossing the hills into Cilicia, had been cut off by the Cili-
cians whether because they had been plund(Ming or whether
because they had s'traggled from the main body, he could not
ascertain. Tn ang(M-^ at the loss of his conn^ades, therefore,
Menon. when he reached Tarsi, gave that city to his soldiers
to j.lnnder : and the inhabitants abandcmed their city.
'0'2, '2. '^'22, 5. =^S:iy Hihias : §11, '2, note. *§49, 3.
EXEHCISK 7.
{Baftrd >>ii Xi'ii., Allah., B. i., cli. ii.)
And so Cvnis, setting out from Sardis, had reaclie<l the
plains of Cilicia ;ind the city of Tarsi. He had cross.>d high
mountains and bi'oa<l rivers and had not lost any of his
soldieis, whether cavalry or ho])lites, except the two companies
which had perished with Menon. Both the king and (jueen of
Cilicia were his friends and li;id given liim gifts aiul money.
His galleys had all sailed )oun<l to Tarsi before he had arrived
and there was nothing 1o piv\.iit liini from going forwanl with
all spe,/'Xj. H(^ believed tli;it he w:is now supei'ior to the Creat
King ;uid*tlia,t he would easily In; al)!e to vaiuiuish all his
liciii'vci' he -liiMiid fall in with them.
armies
^^'-IS. 3.
EXERCISES.
171
tains ill
yenuosis
a A\li()lo
and ad-
ous city
, fur the
diei's, in
the Cili-
whether
■ovdd not
herofore,
soldiers
Exercise (S.
(Ihtsdt ov Xt'iK, Auah., 1>. [., eh. iii., 1-7.)
Hero Cleai'chus, one of the Greek generals, did a thing at
which all must wonder when they hear it.^ His soldiers re-
fused to follow him. They knew that they were marching
against the king. They even stoned him when he tried to
compel thera to follow. He then convened a meeting of the
soldiers and addressed tliem. He said- that he was the friend
of Cyrus but that he was more friendly to thein than to him.
He di<l not wish (he said) to betray them ; that, if they would
not fohow him, he would follow theuv' in order that he inight
be wherever they were.^ To this effect he spoke and the army,
when they heard it, commended wiiat he had said.
ched the
sed high
ly of his
Dmpanies
queen of
1 money.
;l arri\('d
ard with
he (Ireat
h all his
EXEliCISE 9.
(Based on Xi-ii., Auah., H. r., oh. iii., 8-U. )
But Clearchus did not wish the Greeks to withdraw from
Cyrus. He wished to show them what the ditliculty of with-
drawing was.i After some time, therefore, he called his
soldiers together- and told them that he was afraid that Cyrus
would attack them.'' " We have wronged Cyi'us," lie said,
"and Cyrus knows that he has been wronged by us. We nuist^
therefore take counsel what we are going to do about the inatter.
I am afraid that he will anticipate-^ us in making the first
attack.'"' We can all se(^ what-" power he has and how («')?)
liostile h(^ is to those whose enemy h(^ b(Mjom(^s." 'jliiis he; spoke,
pretending to bo afraid. And tlie army consider.'.! what was
best to tlo.
i§37, 3. ^§41,12. ^§21), G, '
iA-l, -1.
'?f4l,
'^tS.
' 01. 3.
172
F,LKMK\T.\i;V tillKKK Pi;oSK C'OMFOSITION.
EXEUCISE 10,
(Based on X<vi., Annh., B. i., cli. iii., 15-21.)
^Vt'tci" that, another of the Greeks al;so spoke. He said tlifit
it was simplicity itself to ask guides or ships from Cyrus. That
it was iuipossihlc to escape without the knowledge of Cyrus,^
and therefore that it was much better for them to select suit-
a])]e p(>rsoiis and send tliem to Cyrus in order that they might
ask him for what purpose- he wished to employ the army.
Tliis, therefore*, th(!y did. They Helected the persons they
thought suital»le and sent them to Cyrus to ask the question-
which th(^y had been ordered to ask. When Cyrus had an-
swered ;ind had pn^mised them an increase of (say (jrrater) pay,
the troops announced that they were willing to obey him as
before, and that they would follow liim even to the River
Euphrates and the city of the Gre.'at King.
1^41, 7. ^omit iiomi; §37, 3.
Exercise i I.
{Based on Xen., Anab., 15. i., ch. iii.)
Clearchus, therefore, had accomplished his object^ and had
persuaded the Greeks once more (av^ts) to follow Cyrus. This,
too, he had effected without- betraying the interests of his
army or deceiving Cyrus. The Gi-eeks had not hesitated to
ask Cyrus for additional pa}^ and this he had promised them
in order that they might ))e willing to renuiin with hira. No
on(! can say whetlier they knew that they wer ^ marching
against the Great King or not.'' This Cyrus had not told
them, lie was afi'aid that, if he tolrl tluMii, they might even
now order theii" genei'ajs to lead them back ttj Gr'eece. lUit
there was nolhing now to prevent;' him from resuming his
ad\ anc(!. '
' iSa\' had donf n-licJ he unshed, fa <lii. '■' Use neg.ativi! ; %-M^. 'J:
*^41, 1. ^i'Vi, 5. *§39, 3, 4. ^Suy (jo forward ayain ; §49, 3.
EXERCISES.
173
lid th."t
;. Thiit
Cyrus, 1
ct suit-
f might
3 army.
ns tlicy
lestion-
liad an-
ler) pay,
him as
i River
KXKKCISK 1L*.
{B(tm/. Oil X'li., Aiiiih.^ li. I., cli. iv., l-().)
From this point the whole army advanced to what was called
" Tlie Gates." Here, there is a uai-row defile leading into Syria
])etween the mountains and the sea. * On this defiles aiM^ two
'..alls running down to the sea. and in eacli wall there is a
crate, from which the place is called '-The Crates." Cyrus
would never have been able^ to pass "The Gates." if Abroco-
mas, the Persian general, had not retr«titr,d from them with
his whole- army. It was said that he had with him three
hundred thousand men. At "The Gates" Cyrus found many
merchantmen lying at anchor, and here also sixty ships of
war of his own joined him. If Ai)rocomas had not withdrawn,
Cyrus intended'* to land troops beside the walls and so to
dislod^re the enemy. This, however, he was not compelled to
do.-^
i§30, 2, (.3). "■'§^>, 1, (-)■ ^f^ay had it in mind. * §42, 2.
itid had
: This,
i of his
lated to
kI them
m. No
lai'ching
not told
rht cNcn
•<'. IJut
ling nis
X40 '}
Exercise 13.
{Based on Xrn., Anah., B. i., ch. iv., 7-11.)
It was here that Cyrus was deserted ])y two of the Greek
generals. They were jealous, apparently,^ of Clearchus. If
Cyrus had gone in pursuit, th^y would have been easily taken.
But he said-^ that by reason of the b.av.ry they had previously
shown in his behalf, he would not injure them or despoil them
of their prop(M-ty. He would only en-iptoy num (he said) whih;
they were willing to remain with him ; that whenever they
wished to depart he would gladly allow them to go. Thus he
spoke, in (»rder that the (Greeks 'night be more zealous on the
nuirch. Nor indeed did he pursue these deserters, though it
was sai(P by some that he had .lone s... T.-t he continued his
march until"* he came ' , the sources of the river Dardas.
174
ELEMKN'TAI{Y OHEKK PROSE COMPOSITION.
KXKIU ISE 14.
{/id.^dil on Xni., Anah., 15. I., oil. iv., 1'2-19.)
Then it was tliat Cyrus ordered the generals to announce to
the army that they were marching against the Great King.
This the generals did ; but the soldiers were indignant because
they tliought that the generals had long known^ this fact, but
had concealed it from them. Cyrus, however, by pi-oniising- to
give them five minas each when they reached Babylon, once moie
{avOi^i) persuaded them to follow him. The soldiers of Menon
were the first to cross the river, doing this in order that Cyi-us
might think them the bravest and most faithful of all the army.
After that, all the rest crossed on foot. This, indeed,- that all
were able to cross safely on foot — seemed to many a most
miraculous event. They thought thtit it showed (St/Aoid) clearly
that Cyrus was about to be king instead of his brother.
i^-J4, r>, (.3). 2 §40, 2.
Exercise 15.
(Based on Xcn., Anah., 1>. i., ch. iv.)
And so the army had at last (reXos) reached the Euphrates
and every soldier in it knew now that he was marching
against the Great King. If Cyrus had told them this
sooner, they wodld perhaps (tcrws) have refused to follow him.
As it was {ivv Si)), by the promises he had niade^ and the gifts
ho. had givtm them, he had rendered them loyal and zealous
They had during their march crv)ssed many rivers, some of them
])y boat, some of them on foot. They had traversed much
countiy, some of it desolate {Iprjfn)^), some of it full of large
and ijrosperous villages. To these last, apparently,- they did
no harm, and Xenophon does not tell us that they burned any
one of tlicMi. He says, however, that they cut down the trees
in the park of the Governor of Syria and burned his palace.
EXKKCISKS.
175
Tins (Ik'V (lid, j)(M'li;i|)s, Ijcojiusc lie li.id run .■iw.iy ami <li<l mtt
wish to l)(^ tViciidly U) Cyi'us Jt'id Ins army.
' §4i), 'A. '^ Use ihKto), iJ.'VJ. 8.
ExKitrisK l().
(Bdxcd oil. Xi'ii., Aitdli.. P>. T., eh. v., 1-7.)
Here many of the nutuntcd troops of Cyrus en^^i.ijjod in
huntiuir the wihl beasts and wild hirds in which this country
abounds. They soon, however, abandoned the chase of the
ostrich, although^ these birds were very numerous. The osti-ieh
can run more swiftly than the horse- and can easily escape
from it. They use l)oth their wings and their feet in running,
so that, on account of their speed, it is impossible to overtake
them. The wild ass is also swifter than the horse. But horse-
men hunt them by relays and, in this way, men capture them.
This country, though there are so many wild beasts in it, is for
the most part destitute of grass and trees. Besides, it was
often, impossible also for the army to find water. Many of the
hor.ses and beasts of buiden consequently peri.shed.
i§:jr,, ('.. 2 §23^ 1,
Exercise 17.
[Based oil Xcn., A/iab., 15. i., cli. v., 5-t7.)
But Cyrus was anxious (use f^ovXoixtn) not to waste tim(\
He knewi that the more rapidly- he advanced, tiie mort> un-
prepared the king would be. At last the army came to a lar,<;v
city; but it was on the other bank of the river, and if ihey
wished to procuie sup])lies from there, they .said that they
must cross the rivcr.^' This they accomplislied in the following^
manner. They made rafts for themselves from skins, filling
the skins with hay and drawing them tight, so that the
water could not touch the hay. Tn tliis way they procured
food ami wine from the city. .Now the soldi-rs of Menon wer(^
angry with Clearchus and attacked hini with stones as he pa.ssed
17G
ELliMENTAKV (IREKK PUOSK COMrOSlTIOX.
VR'
Mifou^'li tho'w cjiinj). I»iit. (vlc'ircliiis cscjijx'd U> liis own (•.•miji
and, ordcriii*^ tin; liorst; llicro to t'<ill(iw him, \\i) iii.irclicd
jij^'Jiinst iMciion. Tlicsei two would jicrluips liavo cntjiijj^cd in
battle, if Cyrus liad not ridden in l)et ween tiieni and hegtjed
them to desist fr'oni attackitiu' one another.
Kxi'MicisK l--'.
{Based mi Xni., Aiiah,. \\. i., eh. v.)
;vt)w the empire of the (Jreat Kini^-, le,' rf\ison of th(> extent
of Its populatiitn, was very powerful; hut liy reason of the
separation of the inluibitants from each other, it was ex-
tremelyi weak. If anyone wished to go to war with tin; king,
he couhl annihihite (use SiaKOTTTw) the royal f(;rces l)efore-' the
several"' parts of the army could be collected together. This
Cyrus knew and therefore he urged on the march by (iM^vy
means in his power, not pausing in his ad\;i,nc(; unless to i)ro-
cure provisions or water. Some of the stages, thei-efore, which
the army marched, were of very gi'cat length, ^ and the fatigue
of the ho|)lites was extreme. On one occasion, as the waggons of
the Greeks seemed to l)e advancing rather slowly^ V)y reast)n of
the diiUcult nature of the ground, Cyrus ordered his Persians
to leap down and rai.se the waggons out of the mud. This
they did, and in many other ways they showed thai their dis-
cipline was of the most p(^rfect descri^jtion."'
l§2;i, :. "^goi, (). M'.sf .■■wm--»;. ^§2,'}, 4. ^ Say nrij ijooi.l.
KXKRCISK 1 'J.
(Ihi.sfd on Xrii., Auah., B. I., oil. vi., 1-5.)
It was here that Cyrus put Orontas to death. It happened
as follows^: Orontas had already plotted more than once
against Cyi'us. He had e\(ni made war upon him. JUit after
that, he had l>e(-n reconciled to Cyius and seemed to have
KXKRCISKS.
177
This
di;
l)oc<)ino his fiiciid. At, this point,- howovor, OronUs juldrcssod
Cyrus iis follows: "If, ( 'ynis, you will giviMiu! a thousjuid
horsemcMi, I will push on and piwciit the kiu-'s (-avalry fi'oui
liiying waste the laud, as they are doinj,' now, with tiiv." This
Cyrus re(iuested him to do, thiidcin*,' that it would be of
advantage to the army. lUit meantime Orontas wi-ote a letter
to the Great King, saying- that, if he could, he would bring
these horsemen over to him. This letter was given to Cyrus
who, when lie had read it,' ordennl Oi-onlas to be arrested^
and brought into his tent.
ij^ll, 2. ''^ay there. ^~io. *§40., 1. ^§41,2.
Exercise 20.
[Ba.'^cil. on XeiL, Amih., V>. i., eh. vi., 7-11.)
Cyrus thereupon summoned a iiumlxn- of friends to Ins
tent, and explained to them why li<^ had sunnm.ned them.i
He said'^ that he had never wronged Orontas; but that he had
found him jjlotting against him nt)W for the third time. He
knew (he said) that if he allowed (kdoj) him to escape again, he
w<,uld make war upon him again. Thereupon he asked Clear-
,.hus to state his opinion with regard to the matter. Clearchus
did so, answering'' that he thought the man should be put out
of the wav, in order that he might plot against pei.ple no more.
Tn this opinion nil tlu; rest acquiesced, and Orontas was le.l
into the tent ..f Artapates, after which he was never seen
a-ain, dead or alive. No one knew the manner of his death.^
<4;i. s^Tse main verb f..r English pivrtic. when em-
is
i'M, 3.
ployeil in this way to append a statement. * Use vb.
KXEIK'ISK 21.
{lia.'^e,! on X<ii., Anah., B. 1., eli. vi.)
On this occasion he spoke as follows; -If I had injured
vou, vou would have done w.ll v .w in seeking to mjure^ me.
li:
I
178
ELKMENTARY CREEK PROSE rOMPOSITION.
r.nt you ;i('l\ii(»\\ l<'(l!4(n!i!il you h.nc iir\fi' i (■(•ciNcd injury fi'<"ii
iiin. I <lo not know tlicrct'oi'c w liy you mv, now seeking once
inor'o to injure! uw. \ S(M! tluit I must- Ix; licicuftet" on mv
LjUHi'd iiifjiinst you, and I will take such pi'ecautions that 3'ou
will no long(;r bo ablo to do me any harm. Notliin<T; shall now
I)revent'' mo from puttin<^ you out of the way, so that you nuiy
never plot ai^^ainst anyone ai^ain. Foi' it is evident that, while*
you are alive, nothing will ever pi-event you from making war
upon me. Do not think' that you shall now escape until'' you
have paid me the penally."
i§L>4, 2; 40, 'J. •^§4'2, 2. ^'M), .S, 4. *g;U, 4. Sg'Jo, 1, (:!). «f!;U,
*'», (2).
EXKHC.'ISE 22.
I
(Babied on Xcn., Ana})., B. i., ch. vii., 1-10.)
Not long after this, Cyrus held a review in the plain of all
his troops, and endeavoured^ particularly to encourage the
(h'eeks for the battle with his brothei-, which he saw was now
approaching. He said- that he knew tlu^ Greeks to be braver
than the Barbarians.'^ That this was why he had led them
against the king and, if they only showed themselves as brave
as he knew they were, that he would make them the envy* of
all in the land. Thereupon, it is said'* that one of the Greeks,
more zealous {7rp60vfxo<;) than the rest, n^plied : "You make many
promises'"' now, Cyrus; but will you remember them, if you
win the day*?" And Cyrus answered that, if he won,' he would
be both able and willing to remember ; th.at his friends should
be satraps of his kingdom, and that to each of the Gi'eeks
should be given a crown of gold.
J§24, 5, (-2). '^§43. ='§2:{, 1. * Use vb. ^§39, 8. 6§49, 3. ^§45
EX-RCTSES.
179
's:{-i,
§45
KXKKOISK '-.H.
(t, mi/ on. Xcii., An(il>., li. ' l-Ii. vii.)
NcsooneH had the king heard that Cx rus wiis <m the march
a^unst hi.n th;u. h. .h,- a la.-e -^ hmg the river
I'^uphrates, t verity feet i.i hroadtli , -.I'oms <loep. It
ran up the c-oun.ry fur forty niih-s, as fa. -. > wluit was called
the Wall i.f :Media. This t. rh the king inten<led as a means
of defence against Cn rus ; uid, when Cyrus arrived at the
trench, he expecfd that the king would inunecHately engage
him in' battle.-^ ;i:hU the king did n.>thing but retreat ; and so
Cyrus and his arniy passed within tl..' trench, all now being
persuaded that they would seize lia without^' Hghtwig.
They accordingly pursued their march towards the city from
this point somewhat carelessly.^ No one can say whv^' the king
<lid not engage Cyrus at the trench. If he had uone so, he
could have easily prevented his advance.''
1 i,:^, .3. •'' Say /i//t« uHih hm. ^ Use negative ; §40, '1. " §'23, 4.
Exb:rcise 21.
(J5amZ on Xeii., Anah.^ 1'.. i., cb. viii., MG.)
\nd so the two armies were facing each other at last,
before the Greeks advanced, Cyrus rode up to Clearchns and
told him to attack the enemy's centre; that the king was
posted there, and if they could conquer it, their t.u.k was
already acron.plished. Now Clearchus was iti co.mnaml of the
rjc.ht win- of the (Jreek forces, and was posted upon t:he river
Euphrates. And he was afraid, if he did what Cyrus had
onlererl, that the king's army would surrouml the Greeks on
both sides. For the kings army was so large that the centre
>xtemled beyond the left of the army of Cyrus. Meantnne,
Ȥ:i7.
liut
ex
therefore, Clearclius remained where he was, and Cyrus rode
off along the line, Now, as Cyrus rode past, Xenophon tells
c^^:^
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
7
y.
^
1.0
I.I
1.25
1^
6"
|M
2.0
118
iA mil 1.6
Sciences
Corporation
23 WEST MAIN STREET
WEBSTER, N.Y. M580
(716) 872-4503
■ ^
^V
^<fe
V
(v^.. ^>
^
k
\\
»
^X^Q
;\
4^
-'f-^
^
^^<^
i
180
ELRMKNTARV OUEEK PROSE COMPOSITION.
IIS iliiit lio n.(l(^ uj) nnrl .-iskcd Cyius if lie li;i(l any cc.mmiinas.
And lir. jin.swcivd : "Tell I he (Jreeks that tlH/auspiecs nro
favourable."
.',
\^' *i
Exercise 25,
[Based Oil Xen., A nob., B, r., c)j. viii., 17-29.)
Meantime the Persian host was advancing and, when the two
ai-niies were not far (ttoXv) from each other, the Greeks also
iH'gan to advance. Jkit before they could reach tlie Barbarian
line, it turned and iled, and the Greeks went in pursuit.
Meantime, the Persian right advanced upon the left wing of
Cyrus, as if to smround it. And Cyrus, innnediately falling
upon the six thousand troops who w^ere stationed in front of
the Great King, put thein to llight, cutting down their com-
niander with his own hand. But in the rout that en.sued,
Cyrus was separated from his foll(jwers, who had started in
pursuit of the enemy. So Cyrus was killed ])y the king's
troops, after having been severely wounded under the eye by
a javelin. Such tlien was the death of Cyrus.
i;inr»,s.
'S ilVO.
le two
s also
wiriaii
rsuit.
ng of
illini"-
)nt of
coin-
sued,
?A in
:in,£;''s
fe by